d/freebsd-skq
1
0
Fork 0
Code Issues Pull Requests Packages Projects Releases Wiki Activity
5058ec1a0c
freebsd-skq/sys/kern/kern_mutex.c

1007 lines
25 KiB
C
Raw Normal View History

Major update to the way synchronization is done in the kernel. Highlights include: * Mutual exclusion is used instead of spl*(). See mutex(9). (Note: The alpha port is still in transition and currently uses both.) * Per-CPU idle processes. * Interrupts are run in their own separate kernel threads and can be preempted (i386 only). Partially contributed by: BSDi (BSD/OS) Submissions by (at least): cp, dfr, dillon, grog, jake, jhb, sheldonh
2000-09-07 01:33:02 +00:00
/*-
* Copyright (c) 1998 Berkeley Software Design, Inc. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. Berkeley Software Design Inc's name may not be used to endorse or
* promote products derived from this software without specific prior
* written permission.
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY BERKELEY SOFTWARE DESIGN INC ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL BERKELEY SOFTWARE DESIGN INC BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* from BSDI $Id: mutex_witness.c,v 1.1.2.20 2000/04/27 03:10:27 cp Exp $
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
* and BSDI $Id: synch_machdep.c,v 2.3.2.39 2000/04/27 03:10:25 cp Exp $
Major update to the way synchronization is done in the kernel. Highlights include: * Mutual exclusion is used instead of spl*(). See mutex(9). (Note: The alpha port is still in transition and currently uses both.) * Per-CPU idle processes. * Interrupts are run in their own separate kernel threads and can be preempted (i386 only). Partially contributed by: BSDi (BSD/OS) Submissions by (at least): cp, dfr, dillon, grog, jake, jhb, sheldonh
2000-09-07 01:33:02 +00:00
*/
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
/*
Remove definition of witness and comment stating that this file implements witness. Witness moved off to subr_witness.c a while ago.
2001-11-15 19:08:55 +00:00
* Machine independent bits of mutex implementation.
Major update to the way synchronization is done in the kernel. Highlights include: * Mutual exclusion is used instead of spl*(). See mutex(9). (Note: The alpha port is still in transition and currently uses both.) * Per-CPU idle processes. * Interrupts are run in their own separate kernel threads and can be preempted (i386 only). Partially contributed by: BSDi (BSD/OS) Submissions by (at least): cp, dfr, dillon, grog, jake, jhb, sheldonh
2000-09-07 01:33:02 +00:00
*/
Use __FBSDID().
2003-06-11 00:56:59 +00:00
#include <sys/cdefs.h>
__FBSDID("$FreeBSD$");
Add code to make default mutexes adaptive if the ADAPTIVE_MUTEXES kernel option is used (not on by default). - In the case of trying to lock a mutex, if the MTX_CONTESTED flag is set, then we can safely read the thread pointer from the mtx_lock member while holding sched_lock. We then examine the thread to see if it is currently executing on another CPU. If it is, then we keep looping instead of blocking. - In the case of trying to unlock a mutex, it is now possible for a mutex to have MTX_CONTESTED set in mtx_lock but to not have any threads actually blocked on it, so we need to handle that case. In that case, we just release the lock as if MTX_CONTESTED was not set and return. - We do not adaptively spin on Giant as Giant is held for long times and it slows SMP systems down to a crawl (it was taking several minutes, like 5-10 or so for my test alpha and sparc64 SMP boxes to boot up when they adaptively spinned on Giant). - We only compile in the code to do this for SMP kernels, it doesn't make sense for UP kernels. Tested on: i386, alpha, sparc64
2002-05-21 20:47:11 +00:00
#include "opt_adaptive_mutexes.h"
Include the right headers to get the DDB #define and the db_active variable.
2000-11-15 22:08:16 +00:00
#include "opt_ddb.h"
MUTEX_PROFILING has been generalized to LOCK_PROFILING. We now profile wait (time waited to acquire) and hold times for *all* kernel locks. If the architecture has a system synchronized TSC, the profiling code will use that - thereby minimizing profiling overhead. Large chunks of profiling code have been moved out of line, the overhead measured on the T1 for when it is compiled in but not enabled is < 1%. Approved by: scottl (standing in for mentor rwatson) Reviewed by: des and jhb
2006-11-11 03:18:07 +00:00
#include "opt_global.h"
Add software PMC support. New kernel events can be added at various location for sampling or counting. This will for example allow easy system profiling whatever the processor is with known tools like pmcstat(8). Simultaneous usage of software PMC and hardware PMC is possible, for example looking at the lock acquire failure, page fault while sampling on instructions. Sponsored by: NETASQ MFC after: 1 month
2012-03-28 20:58:30 +00:00
#include "opt_hwpmc_hooks.h"
Turn PREEMPTION into a kernel option. Make sure that it's defined if FULL_PREEMPTION is defined. Add a runtime warning to ULE if PREEMPTION is enabled (code inspired by the PREEMPTION warning in kern_switch.c). This is a possible MT5 candidate.
2004-09-02 18:59:15 +00:00
#include "opt_sched.h"
- Use MUTEX_DECLARE() and MTX_COLD for the WITNESS code's internal mutex so it can function before malloc(9) is up and running. - Add two new options WITNESS_DDB and WITNESS_SKIPSPIN. If WITNESS_SKIPSPIN is enabled, then spin mutexes are ignored by the WITNESS code. If WITNESS_DDB is turned on and DDB is compiled into the kernel, then the kernel will drop into DDB when either a lock hierarchy violation occurs or mutexes are held when going to sleep. - Add some new sysctls: debug.witness_ddb is a read-write sysctl that corresponds to WITNESS_DDB. The kernel option merely changes the default value to on at boot. debug.witness_skipspin is a read-only sysctl that one can use to determine if the kernel was compiled with WITNESS_SKIPSPIN. - Wipe out the BSD/OS-specific lock order lists. We get to build our own lists now as we add mutexes to the kernel.
2000-10-27 02:59:30 +00:00
Major update to the way synchronization is done in the kernel. Highlights include: * Mutual exclusion is used instead of spl*(). See mutex(9). (Note: The alpha port is still in transition and currently uses both.) * Per-CPU idle processes. * Interrupts are run in their own separate kernel threads and can be preempted (i386 only). Partially contributed by: BSDi (BSD/OS) Submissions by (at least): cp, dfr, dillon, grog, jake, jhb, sheldonh
2000-09-07 01:33:02 +00:00
#include <sys/param.h>
Mutex profiling code, conditional on the MUTEX_PROFILING option. Adds the following sysctl variables: debug.mutex.prof.enable enable / disable profiling debug.mutex.prof.acquisitions number of mutex acquisitions recorded debug.mutex.prof.records number of acquisition points recorded debug.mutex.prof.maxrecords max number of acquisition points debug.mutex.prof.rejected number of rejections (due to full table) debug.mutex.prof.hashsize hash size debug.mutex.prof.collisions number of hash collisions debug.mutex.prof.stats profiling statistics The code records four numbers for each acquisition point (identified by source file name and line number): longest time held, total time held, number of non-recursive acquisitions, average time held. The measurements are in clock cycles (as returned by get_cyclecount(9)); this may cause measurements on some SMP systems to be unreliable. This can probably be worked around by replacing get_cyclecount(9) by some incarnation of nanotime(9). This work was derived from initial patches by eivind.
2002-04-02 00:01:49 +00:00
#include <sys/systm.h>
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
#include <sys/bus.h>
Ignore mutex asserts when we're dumping as well. This allows me to panic a system from DDB when INVARIANTS is compiled into the kernel on a scsi system.
2005-07-30 05:54:30 +00:00
#include <sys/conf.h>
Update for the KDB framework: o Make debugging code conditional upon KDB instead of DDB. o Call kdb_enter() instead of Debugger(). o Call kdb_backtrace() instead of db_print_backtrace() or backtrace(). kern_mutex.c: o Replace checks for db_active with checks for kdb_active and make them unconditional. kern_shutdown.c: o s/DDB_UNATTENDED/KDB_UNATTENDED/g o s/DDB_TRACE/KDB_TRACE/g o Save the TID of the thread doing the kernel dump so the debugger knows which thread to select as the current when debugging the kernel core file. o Clear kdb_active instead of db_active and do so unconditionally. o Remove backtrace() implementation. kern_synch.c: o Call kdb_reenter() instead of db_error().
2004-07-10 21:36:01 +00:00
#include <sys/kdb.h>
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
#include <sys/kernel.h>
Mutex profiling code, conditional on the MUTEX_PROFILING option. Adds the following sysctl variables: debug.mutex.prof.enable enable / disable profiling debug.mutex.prof.acquisitions number of mutex acquisitions recorded debug.mutex.prof.records number of acquisition points recorded debug.mutex.prof.maxrecords max number of acquisition points debug.mutex.prof.rejected number of rejections (due to full table) debug.mutex.prof.hashsize hash size debug.mutex.prof.collisions number of hash collisions debug.mutex.prof.stats profiling statistics The code records four numbers for each acquisition point (identified by source file name and line number): longest time held, total time held, number of non-recursive acquisitions, average time held. The measurements are in clock cycles (as returned by get_cyclecount(9)); this may cause measurements on some SMP systems to be unreliable. This can probably be worked around by replacing get_cyclecount(9) by some incarnation of nanotime(9). This work was derived from initial patches by eivind.
2002-04-02 00:01:49 +00:00
#include <sys/ktr.h>
Rework the witness code to work with sx locks as well as mutexes. - Introduce lock classes and lock objects. Each lock class specifies a name and set of flags (or properties) shared by all locks of a given type. Currently there are three lock classes: spin mutexes, sleep mutexes, and sx locks. A lock object specifies properties of an additional lock along with a lock name and all of the extra stuff needed to make witness work with a given lock. This abstract lock stuff is defined in sys/lock.h. The lockmgr constants, types, and prototypes have been moved to sys/lockmgr.h. For temporary backwards compatability, sys/lock.h includes sys/lockmgr.h. - Replace proc->p_spinlocks with a per-CPU list, PCPU(spinlocks), of spin locks held. By making this per-cpu, we do not have to jump through magic hoops to deal with sched_lock changing ownership during context switches. - Replace proc->p_heldmtx, formerly a list of held sleep mutexes, with proc->p_sleeplocks, which is a list of held sleep locks including sleep mutexes and sx locks. - Add helper macros for logging lock events via the KTR_LOCK KTR logging level so that the log messages are consistent. - Add some new flags that can be passed to mtx_init(): - MTX_NOWITNESS - specifies that this lock should be ignored by witness. This is used for the mutex that blocks a sx lock for example. - MTX_QUIET - this is not new, but you can pass this to mtx_init() now and no events will be logged for this lock, so that one doesn't have to change all the individual mtx_lock/unlock() operations. - All lock objects maintain an initialized flag. Use this flag to export a mtx_initialized() macro that can be safely called from drivers. Also, we on longer walk the all_mtx list if MUTEX_DEBUG is defined as witness performs the corresponding checks using the initialized flag. - The lock order reversal messages have been improved to output slightly more accurate file and line numbers.
2001-03-28 09:03:24 +00:00
#include <sys/lock.h>
Undo part of the tangle of having sys/lock.h and sys/mutex.h included in other "system" header files. Also help the deprecation of lockmgr.h by making it a sub-include of sys/lock.h and removing sys/lockmgr.h form kernel .c files. Sort sys/*.h includes where possible in affected files. OK'ed by: bde (with reservations)
2001-05-01 08:13:21 +00:00
#include <sys/malloc.h>
Rework the witness code to work with sx locks as well as mutexes. - Introduce lock classes and lock objects. Each lock class specifies a name and set of flags (or properties) shared by all locks of a given type. Currently there are three lock classes: spin mutexes, sleep mutexes, and sx locks. A lock object specifies properties of an additional lock along with a lock name and all of the extra stuff needed to make witness work with a given lock. This abstract lock stuff is defined in sys/lock.h. The lockmgr constants, types, and prototypes have been moved to sys/lockmgr.h. For temporary backwards compatability, sys/lock.h includes sys/lockmgr.h. - Replace proc->p_spinlocks with a per-CPU list, PCPU(spinlocks), of spin locks held. By making this per-cpu, we do not have to jump through magic hoops to deal with sched_lock changing ownership during context switches. - Replace proc->p_heldmtx, formerly a list of held sleep mutexes, with proc->p_sleeplocks, which is a list of held sleep locks including sleep mutexes and sx locks. - Add helper macros for logging lock events via the KTR_LOCK KTR logging level so that the log messages are consistent. - Add some new flags that can be passed to mtx_init(): - MTX_NOWITNESS - specifies that this lock should be ignored by witness. This is used for the mutex that blocks a sx lock for example. - MTX_QUIET - this is not new, but you can pass this to mtx_init() now and no events will be logged for this lock, so that one doesn't have to change all the individual mtx_lock/unlock() operations. - All lock objects maintain an initialized flag. Use this flag to export a mtx_initialized() macro that can be safely called from drivers. Also, we on longer walk the all_mtx list if MUTEX_DEBUG is defined as witness performs the corresponding checks using the initialized flag. - The lock order reversal messages have been improved to output slightly more accurate file and line numbers.
2001-03-28 09:03:24 +00:00
#include <sys/mutex.h>
Major update to the way synchronization is done in the kernel. Highlights include: * Mutual exclusion is used instead of spl*(). See mutex(9). (Note: The alpha port is still in transition and currently uses both.) * Per-CPU idle processes. * Interrupts are run in their own separate kernel threads and can be preempted (i386 only). Partially contributed by: BSDi (BSD/OS) Submissions by (at least): cp, dfr, dillon, grog, jake, jhb, sheldonh
2000-09-07 01:33:02 +00:00
#include <sys/proc.h>
Count the context switch when blocking on a mutex as a voluntary context switch. Count the context switch when preempting the current thread to let a higher priority thread blocked on a mutex we just released run as an involuntary context switch. Reported by: bde
2001-06-25 18:29:32 +00:00
#include <sys/resourcevar.h>
- Create a new scheduler api that is defined in sys/sched.h - Begin moving scheduler specific functionality into sched_4bsd.c - Replace direct manipulation of scheduler data with hooks provided by the new api. - Remove KSE specific state modifications and single runq assumptions from kern_switch.c Reviewed by: -arch
2002-10-12 05:32:24 +00:00
#include <sys/sched.h>
Mutex profiling code, conditional on the MUTEX_PROFILING option. Adds the following sysctl variables: debug.mutex.prof.enable enable / disable profiling debug.mutex.prof.acquisitions number of mutex acquisitions recorded debug.mutex.prof.records number of acquisition points recorded debug.mutex.prof.maxrecords max number of acquisition points debug.mutex.prof.rejected number of rejections (due to full table) debug.mutex.prof.hashsize hash size debug.mutex.prof.collisions number of hash collisions debug.mutex.prof.stats profiling statistics The code records four numbers for each acquisition point (identified by source file name and line number): longest time held, total time held, number of non-recursive acquisitions, average time held. The measurements are in clock cycles (as returned by get_cyclecount(9)); this may cause measurements on some SMP systems to be unreliable. This can probably be worked around by replacing get_cyclecount(9) by some incarnation of nanotime(9). This work was derived from initial patches by eivind.
2002-04-02 00:01:49 +00:00
#include <sys/sbuf.h>
- Use MUTEX_DECLARE() and MTX_COLD for the WITNESS code's internal mutex so it can function before malloc(9) is up and running. - Add two new options WITNESS_DDB and WITNESS_SKIPSPIN. If WITNESS_SKIPSPIN is enabled, then spin mutexes are ignored by the WITNESS code. If WITNESS_DDB is turned on and DDB is compiled into the kernel, then the kernel will drop into DDB when either a lock hierarchy violation occurs or mutexes are held when going to sleep. - Add some new sysctls: debug.witness_ddb is a read-write sysctl that corresponds to WITNESS_DDB. The kernel option merely changes the default value to on at boot. debug.witness_skipspin is a read-only sysctl that one can use to determine if the kernel was compiled with WITNESS_SKIPSPIN. - Wipe out the BSD/OS-specific lock order lists. We get to build our own lists now as we add mutexes to the kernel.
2000-10-27 02:59:30 +00:00
#include <sys/sysctl.h>
Add an implementation of turnstiles and change the sleep mutex code to use turnstiles to implement blocking isntead of implementing a thread queue directly. These turnstiles are somewhat similar to those used in Solaris 7 as described in Solaris Internals but are also different. Turnstiles do not come out of a fixed-sized pool. Rather, each thread is assigned a turnstile when it is created that it frees when it is destroyed. When a thread blocks on a lock, it donates its turnstile to that lock to serve as queue of blocked threads. The queue associated with a given lock is found by a lookup in a simple hash table. The turnstile itself is protected by a lock associated with its entry in the hash table. This means that sched_lock is no longer needed to contest on a mutex. Instead, sched_lock is only used when manipulating run queues or thread priorities. Turnstiles also implement priority propagation inherently. Currently turnstiles only support mutexes. Eventually, however, turnstiles may grow two queue's to support a non-sleepable reader/writer lock implementation. For more details, see the comments in sys/turnstile.h and kern/subr_turnstile.c. The two primary advantages from the turnstile code include: 1) the size of struct mutex shrinks by four pointers as it no longer stores the thread queue linkages directly, and 2) less contention on sched_lock in SMP systems including the ability for multiple CPUs to contend on different locks simultaneously (not that this last detail is necessarily that much of a big win). Note that 1) means that this commit is a kernel ABI breaker, so don't mix old modules with a new kernel and vice versa. Tested on: i386 SMP, sparc64 SMP, alpha SMP
2003-11-11 22:07:29 +00:00
#include <sys/turnstile.h>
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
#include <sys/vmmeter.h>
MUTEX_PROFILING has been generalized to LOCK_PROFILING. We now profile wait (time waited to acquire) and hold times for *all* kernel locks. If the architecture has a system synchronized TSC, the profiling code will use that - thereby minimizing profiling overhead. Large chunks of profiling code have been moved out of line, the overhead measured on the T1 for when it is compiled in but not enabled is < 1%. Approved by: scottl (standing in for mentor rwatson) Reviewed by: des and jhb
2006-11-11 03:18:07 +00:00
#include <sys/lock_profile.h>
Major update to the way synchronization is done in the kernel. Highlights include: * Mutual exclusion is used instead of spl*(). See mutex(9). (Note: The alpha port is still in transition and currently uses both.) * Per-CPU idle processes. * Interrupts are run in their own separate kernel threads and can be preempted (i386 only). Partially contributed by: BSDi (BSD/OS) Submissions by (at least): cp, dfr, dillon, grog, jake, jhb, sheldonh
2000-09-07 01:33:02 +00:00
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
#include <machine/atomic.h>
#include <machine/bus.h>
Major update to the way synchronization is done in the kernel. Highlights include: * Mutual exclusion is used instead of spl*(). See mutex(9). (Note: The alpha port is still in transition and currently uses both.) * Per-CPU idle processes. * Interrupts are run in their own separate kernel threads and can be preempted (i386 only). Partially contributed by: BSDi (BSD/OS) Submissions by (at least): cp, dfr, dillon, grog, jake, jhb, sheldonh
2000-09-07 01:33:02 +00:00
#include <machine/cpu.h>
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
Include the right headers to get the DDB #define and the db_active variable.
2000-11-15 22:08:16 +00:00
#include <ddb/ddb.h>
Move the initialization of the devmtx into the mutex_init() function called during early init before cninit(). Tested on: i386, alpha, sparc64 Reviewed by: phk, imp Reported by: Divacky Roman xdivac02 at stud dot fit dot vutbr dot cz MFC after: 1 week
2005-10-18 18:27:44 +00:00
#include <fs/devfs/devfs_int.h>
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
#include <vm/vm.h>
#include <vm/vm_extern.h>
- Simplify the #ifdef's for adaptive mutexes and rwlocks by conditionally defining a macro earlier in the file. - Add NO_ADAPTIVE_RWLOCKS option to disable adaptive spinning for rwlocks.
2007-03-22 16:09:23 +00:00
#if defined(SMP) && !defined(NO_ADAPTIVE_MUTEXES)
#define ADAPTIVE_MUTEXES
#endif
Add software PMC support. New kernel events can be added at various location for sampling or counting. This will for example allow easy system profiling whatever the processor is with known tools like pmcstat(8). Simultaneous usage of software PMC and hardware PMC is possible, for example looking at the lock acquire failure, page fault while sampling on instructions. Sponsored by: NETASQ MFC after: 1 month
2012-03-28 20:58:30 +00:00
#ifdef HWPMC_HOOKS
#include <sys/pmckern.h>
PMC_SOFT_DEFINE( , , lock, failed);
#endif
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
/*
* Return the mutex address when the lock cookie address is provided.
* This functionality assumes that struct mtx* have a member named mtx_lock.
*/
#define mtxlock2mtx(c) (__containerof(c, struct mtx, mtx_lock))
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
/*
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
* Internal utility macros.
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
*/
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
#define mtx_unowned(m) ((m)->mtx_lock == MTX_UNOWNED)
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
Teach 'show lock' to properly handle a destroyed mutex.
2007-05-08 21:50:46 +00:00
#define mtx_destroyed(m) ((m)->mtx_lock == MTX_DESTROYED)
Bah, fix fat finger in last. Invert the ~ on MTX_FLAGMASK as it's non-intuitive for the ~ to be built into the mask. All the users now explicitly ~ the mask. In addition, add MTX_UNOWNED to the mask even though it technically isn't a flag. This should unbreak mtx_owner(). Quickly spotted by: kris
2006-06-03 21:11:33 +00:00
#define mtx_owner(m) ((struct thread *)((m)->mtx_lock & ~MTX_FLAGMASK))
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
Constify arguments for locking KPIs where possible. This enables locking consumers to pass their own structures around as const and be able to assert locks embedded into those structures. Reviewed by: ed, kib, jhb
2011-11-16 21:51:17 +00:00
static void assert_mtx(const struct lock_object *lock, int what);
Add a new 'show lock' command to ddb. If the argument has a valid lock class, then it displays various information about the lock and calls a new function pointer in lock_class (lc_ddb_show) to dump class-specific information about the lock as well (such as the owner of a mutex or xlock'ed sx lock). This is easier than staring at hex dumps of locks to figure out who owns the lock, etc. Note that extending lock_class doesn't affect the ABI for any kernel modules as the only code that deals with lock_class structures directly is kern_mutex.c, kern_sx.c, and witness. MFC after: 1 week
2005-12-13 23:14:35 +00:00
#ifdef DDB
Constify arguments for locking KPIs where possible. This enables locking consumers to pass their own structures around as const and be able to assert locks embedded into those structures. Reviewed by: ed, kib, jhb
2011-11-16 21:51:17 +00:00
static void db_show_mtx(const struct lock_object *lock);
Add a new 'show lock' command to ddb. If the argument has a valid lock class, then it displays various information about the lock and calls a new function pointer in lock_class (lc_ddb_show) to dump class-specific information about the lock as well (such as the owner of a mutex or xlock'ed sx lock). This is easier than staring at hex dumps of locks to figure out who owns the lock, etc. Note that extending lock_class doesn't affect the ABI for any kernel modules as the only code that deals with lock_class structures directly is kern_mutex.c, kern_sx.c, and witness. MFC after: 1 week
2005-12-13 23:14:35 +00:00
#endif
Fix lc_lock/lc_unlock() support for rmlocks held in shared mode. With current lock classes KPI it was really difficult because there was no way to pass an rmtracker object to the lock/unlock routines. In order to accomplish the task, modify the aforementioned functions so that they can return (or pass as argument) an uinptr_t, which is in the rm case used to hold a pointer to struct rm_priotracker for current thread. As an added bonus, this fixes rm_sleep() in the rm shared case, which right now can communicate priotracker structure between lc_unlock()/lc_lock(). Suggested by: jhb Reviewed by: jhb Approved by: re (delphij)
2013-09-20 23:06:21 +00:00
static void lock_mtx(struct lock_object *lock, uintptr_t how);
static void lock_spin(struct lock_object *lock, uintptr_t how);
Add the OpenSolaris dtrace lockstat provider. The lockstat provider adds probes for mutexes, reader/writer and shared/exclusive locks to gather contention statistics and other locking information for dtrace scripts, the lockstat(1M) command and other potential consumers. Reviewed by: attilio jhb jb Approved by: gnn (mentor)
2009-05-26 20:28:22 +00:00
#ifdef KDTRACE_HOOKS
Constify arguments for locking KPIs where possible. This enables locking consumers to pass their own structures around as const and be able to assert locks embedded into those structures. Reviewed by: ed, kib, jhb
2011-11-16 21:51:17 +00:00
static int owner_mtx(const struct lock_object *lock,
struct thread **owner);
Add the OpenSolaris dtrace lockstat provider. The lockstat provider adds probes for mutexes, reader/writer and shared/exclusive locks to gather contention statistics and other locking information for dtrace scripts, the lockstat(1M) command and other potential consumers. Reviewed by: attilio jhb jb Approved by: gnn (mentor)
2009-05-26 20:28:22 +00:00
#endif
Fix lc_lock/lc_unlock() support for rmlocks held in shared mode. With current lock classes KPI it was really difficult because there was no way to pass an rmtracker object to the lock/unlock routines. In order to accomplish the task, modify the aforementioned functions so that they can return (or pass as argument) an uinptr_t, which is in the rm case used to hold a pointer to struct rm_priotracker for current thread. As an added bonus, this fixes rm_sleep() in the rm shared case, which right now can communicate priotracker structure between lc_unlock()/lc_lock(). Suggested by: jhb Reviewed by: jhb Approved by: re (delphij)
2013-09-20 23:06:21 +00:00
static uintptr_t unlock_mtx(struct lock_object *lock);
static uintptr_t unlock_spin(struct lock_object *lock);
Add a new 'show lock' command to ddb. If the argument has a valid lock class, then it displays various information about the lock and calls a new function pointer in lock_class (lc_ddb_show) to dump class-specific information about the lock as well (such as the owner of a mutex or xlock'ed sx lock). This is easier than staring at hex dumps of locks to figure out who owns the lock, etc. Note that extending lock_class doesn't affect the ABI for any kernel modules as the only code that deals with lock_class structures directly is kern_mutex.c, kern_sx.c, and witness. MFC after: 1 week
2005-12-13 23:14:35 +00:00
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
/*
Rework the witness code to work with sx locks as well as mutexes. - Introduce lock classes and lock objects. Each lock class specifies a name and set of flags (or properties) shared by all locks of a given type. Currently there are three lock classes: spin mutexes, sleep mutexes, and sx locks. A lock object specifies properties of an additional lock along with a lock name and all of the extra stuff needed to make witness work with a given lock. This abstract lock stuff is defined in sys/lock.h. The lockmgr constants, types, and prototypes have been moved to sys/lockmgr.h. For temporary backwards compatability, sys/lock.h includes sys/lockmgr.h. - Replace proc->p_spinlocks with a per-CPU list, PCPU(spinlocks), of spin locks held. By making this per-cpu, we do not have to jump through magic hoops to deal with sched_lock changing ownership during context switches. - Replace proc->p_heldmtx, formerly a list of held sleep mutexes, with proc->p_sleeplocks, which is a list of held sleep locks including sleep mutexes and sx locks. - Add helper macros for logging lock events via the KTR_LOCK KTR logging level so that the log messages are consistent. - Add some new flags that can be passed to mtx_init(): - MTX_NOWITNESS - specifies that this lock should be ignored by witness. This is used for the mutex that blocks a sx lock for example. - MTX_QUIET - this is not new, but you can pass this to mtx_init() now and no events will be logged for this lock, so that one doesn't have to change all the individual mtx_lock/unlock() operations. - All lock objects maintain an initialized flag. Use this flag to export a mtx_initialized() macro that can be safely called from drivers. Also, we on longer walk the all_mtx list if MUTEX_DEBUG is defined as witness performs the corresponding checks using the initialized flag. - The lock order reversal messages have been improved to output slightly more accurate file and line numbers.
2001-03-28 09:03:24 +00:00
* Lock classes for sleep and spin mutexes.
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
*/
Rework the witness code to work with sx locks as well as mutexes. - Introduce lock classes and lock objects. Each lock class specifies a name and set of flags (or properties) shared by all locks of a given type. Currently there are three lock classes: spin mutexes, sleep mutexes, and sx locks. A lock object specifies properties of an additional lock along with a lock name and all of the extra stuff needed to make witness work with a given lock. This abstract lock stuff is defined in sys/lock.h. The lockmgr constants, types, and prototypes have been moved to sys/lockmgr.h. For temporary backwards compatability, sys/lock.h includes sys/lockmgr.h. - Replace proc->p_spinlocks with a per-CPU list, PCPU(spinlocks), of spin locks held. By making this per-cpu, we do not have to jump through magic hoops to deal with sched_lock changing ownership during context switches. - Replace proc->p_heldmtx, formerly a list of held sleep mutexes, with proc->p_sleeplocks, which is a list of held sleep locks including sleep mutexes and sx locks. - Add helper macros for logging lock events via the KTR_LOCK KTR logging level so that the log messages are consistent. - Add some new flags that can be passed to mtx_init(): - MTX_NOWITNESS - specifies that this lock should be ignored by witness. This is used for the mutex that blocks a sx lock for example. - MTX_QUIET - this is not new, but you can pass this to mtx_init() now and no events will be logged for this lock, so that one doesn't have to change all the individual mtx_lock/unlock() operations. - All lock objects maintain an initialized flag. Use this flag to export a mtx_initialized() macro that can be safely called from drivers. Also, we on longer walk the all_mtx list if MUTEX_DEBUG is defined as witness performs the corresponding checks using the initialized flag. - The lock order reversal messages have been improved to output slightly more accurate file and line numbers.
2001-03-28 09:03:24 +00:00
struct lock_class lock_class_mtx_sleep = {
Use C99-style struct member initialization for lock classes.
2007-03-09 16:04:44 +00:00
.lc_name = "sleep mutex",
.lc_flags = LC_SLEEPLOCK | LC_RECURSABLE,
Expand lock class with the "virtual" function lc_assert which will offer an unified way for all the lock primitives to express lock assertions. Currenty, lockmgrs and rmlocks don't have assertions, so just panic in that case. This will be a base for more callout improvements. Ok'ed by: jhb, jeff
2007-11-18 14:43:53 +00:00
.lc_assert = assert_mtx,
Add a new 'show lock' command to ddb. If the argument has a valid lock class, then it displays various information about the lock and calls a new function pointer in lock_class (lc_ddb_show) to dump class-specific information about the lock as well (such as the owner of a mutex or xlock'ed sx lock). This is easier than staring at hex dumps of locks to figure out who owns the lock, etc. Note that extending lock_class doesn't affect the ABI for any kernel modules as the only code that deals with lock_class structures directly is kern_mutex.c, kern_sx.c, and witness. MFC after: 1 week
2005-12-13 23:14:35 +00:00
#ifdef DDB
Use C99-style struct member initialization for lock classes.
2007-03-09 16:04:44 +00:00
.lc_ddb_show = db_show_mtx,
Add a new 'show lock' command to ddb. If the argument has a valid lock class, then it displays various information about the lock and calls a new function pointer in lock_class (lc_ddb_show) to dump class-specific information about the lock as well (such as the owner of a mutex or xlock'ed sx lock). This is easier than staring at hex dumps of locks to figure out who owns the lock, etc. Note that extending lock_class doesn't affect the ABI for any kernel modules as the only code that deals with lock_class structures directly is kern_mutex.c, kern_sx.c, and witness. MFC after: 1 week
2005-12-13 23:14:35 +00:00
#endif
Add two new function pointers 'lc_lock' and 'lc_unlock' to lock classes. These functions are intended to be used to drop a lock and then reacquire it when doing an sleep such as msleep(9). Both functions accept a 'struct lock_object *' as their first parameter. The 'lc_unlock' function returns an integer that is then passed as the second paramter to the subsequent 'lc_lock' function. This can be used to communicate state. For example, sx locks and rwlocks use this to indicate if the lock was share/read locked vs exclusive/write locked. Currently, spin mutexes and lockmgr locks do not provide working lc_lock and lc_unlock functions.
2007-03-09 16:27:11 +00:00
.lc_lock = lock_mtx,
.lc_unlock = unlock_mtx,
Add the OpenSolaris dtrace lockstat provider. The lockstat provider adds probes for mutexes, reader/writer and shared/exclusive locks to gather contention statistics and other locking information for dtrace scripts, the lockstat(1M) command and other potential consumers. Reviewed by: attilio jhb jb Approved by: gnn (mentor)
2009-05-26 20:28:22 +00:00
#ifdef KDTRACE_HOOKS
.lc_owner = owner_mtx,
#endif
Rework the witness code to work with sx locks as well as mutexes. - Introduce lock classes and lock objects. Each lock class specifies a name and set of flags (or properties) shared by all locks of a given type. Currently there are three lock classes: spin mutexes, sleep mutexes, and sx locks. A lock object specifies properties of an additional lock along with a lock name and all of the extra stuff needed to make witness work with a given lock. This abstract lock stuff is defined in sys/lock.h. The lockmgr constants, types, and prototypes have been moved to sys/lockmgr.h. For temporary backwards compatability, sys/lock.h includes sys/lockmgr.h. - Replace proc->p_spinlocks with a per-CPU list, PCPU(spinlocks), of spin locks held. By making this per-cpu, we do not have to jump through magic hoops to deal with sched_lock changing ownership during context switches. - Replace proc->p_heldmtx, formerly a list of held sleep mutexes, with proc->p_sleeplocks, which is a list of held sleep locks including sleep mutexes and sx locks. - Add helper macros for logging lock events via the KTR_LOCK KTR logging level so that the log messages are consistent. - Add some new flags that can be passed to mtx_init(): - MTX_NOWITNESS - specifies that this lock should be ignored by witness. This is used for the mutex that blocks a sx lock for example. - MTX_QUIET - this is not new, but you can pass this to mtx_init() now and no events will be logged for this lock, so that one doesn't have to change all the individual mtx_lock/unlock() operations. - All lock objects maintain an initialized flag. Use this flag to export a mtx_initialized() macro that can be safely called from drivers. Also, we on longer walk the all_mtx list if MUTEX_DEBUG is defined as witness performs the corresponding checks using the initialized flag. - The lock order reversal messages have been improved to output slightly more accurate file and line numbers.
2001-03-28 09:03:24 +00:00
};
struct lock_class lock_class_mtx_spin = {
Use C99-style struct member initialization for lock classes.
2007-03-09 16:04:44 +00:00
.lc_name = "spin mutex",
.lc_flags = LC_SPINLOCK | LC_RECURSABLE,
Expand lock class with the "virtual" function lc_assert which will offer an unified way for all the lock primitives to express lock assertions. Currenty, lockmgrs and rmlocks don't have assertions, so just panic in that case. This will be a base for more callout improvements. Ok'ed by: jhb, jeff
2007-11-18 14:43:53 +00:00
.lc_assert = assert_mtx,
Add a new 'show lock' command to ddb. If the argument has a valid lock class, then it displays various information about the lock and calls a new function pointer in lock_class (lc_ddb_show) to dump class-specific information about the lock as well (such as the owner of a mutex or xlock'ed sx lock). This is easier than staring at hex dumps of locks to figure out who owns the lock, etc. Note that extending lock_class doesn't affect the ABI for any kernel modules as the only code that deals with lock_class structures directly is kern_mutex.c, kern_sx.c, and witness. MFC after: 1 week
2005-12-13 23:14:35 +00:00
#ifdef DDB
Use C99-style struct member initialization for lock classes.
2007-03-09 16:04:44 +00:00
.lc_ddb_show = db_show_mtx,
Add a new 'show lock' command to ddb. If the argument has a valid lock class, then it displays various information about the lock and calls a new function pointer in lock_class (lc_ddb_show) to dump class-specific information about the lock as well (such as the owner of a mutex or xlock'ed sx lock). This is easier than staring at hex dumps of locks to figure out who owns the lock, etc. Note that extending lock_class doesn't affect the ABI for any kernel modules as the only code that deals with lock_class structures directly is kern_mutex.c, kern_sx.c, and witness. MFC after: 1 week
2005-12-13 23:14:35 +00:00
#endif
Add two new function pointers 'lc_lock' and 'lc_unlock' to lock classes. These functions are intended to be used to drop a lock and then reacquire it when doing an sleep such as msleep(9). Both functions accept a 'struct lock_object *' as their first parameter. The 'lc_unlock' function returns an integer that is then passed as the second paramter to the subsequent 'lc_lock' function. This can be used to communicate state. For example, sx locks and rwlocks use this to indicate if the lock was share/read locked vs exclusive/write locked. Currently, spin mutexes and lockmgr locks do not provide working lc_lock and lc_unlock functions.
2007-03-09 16:27:11 +00:00
.lc_lock = lock_spin,
.lc_unlock = unlock_spin,
Add the OpenSolaris dtrace lockstat provider. The lockstat provider adds probes for mutexes, reader/writer and shared/exclusive locks to gather contention statistics and other locking information for dtrace scripts, the lockstat(1M) command and other potential consumers. Reviewed by: attilio jhb jb Approved by: gnn (mentor)
2009-05-26 20:28:22 +00:00
#ifdef KDTRACE_HOOKS
.lc_owner = owner_mtx,
#endif
Rework the witness code to work with sx locks as well as mutexes. - Introduce lock classes and lock objects. Each lock class specifies a name and set of flags (or properties) shared by all locks of a given type. Currently there are three lock classes: spin mutexes, sleep mutexes, and sx locks. A lock object specifies properties of an additional lock along with a lock name and all of the extra stuff needed to make witness work with a given lock. This abstract lock stuff is defined in sys/lock.h. The lockmgr constants, types, and prototypes have been moved to sys/lockmgr.h. For temporary backwards compatability, sys/lock.h includes sys/lockmgr.h. - Replace proc->p_spinlocks with a per-CPU list, PCPU(spinlocks), of spin locks held. By making this per-cpu, we do not have to jump through magic hoops to deal with sched_lock changing ownership during context switches. - Replace proc->p_heldmtx, formerly a list of held sleep mutexes, with proc->p_sleeplocks, which is a list of held sleep locks including sleep mutexes and sx locks. - Add helper macros for logging lock events via the KTR_LOCK KTR logging level so that the log messages are consistent. - Add some new flags that can be passed to mtx_init(): - MTX_NOWITNESS - specifies that this lock should be ignored by witness. This is used for the mutex that blocks a sx lock for example. - MTX_QUIET - this is not new, but you can pass this to mtx_init() now and no events will be logged for this lock, so that one doesn't have to change all the individual mtx_lock/unlock() operations. - All lock objects maintain an initialized flag. Use this flag to export a mtx_initialized() macro that can be safely called from drivers. Also, we on longer walk the all_mtx list if MUTEX_DEBUG is defined as witness performs the corresponding checks using the initialized flag. - The lock order reversal messages have been improved to output slightly more accurate file and line numbers.
2001-03-28 09:03:24 +00:00
};
- Place back STR string declarations for lock/unlock strings used for KTR_LOCK tracing in order to avoid duplication. - Insert some tracepoints back into the mutex acq/rel code, thus ensuring that we can trace all lock acq/rel's again. - All CURPROC != NULL checks are MPASS()es (under MUTEX_DEBUG) because they signify a serious mutex corruption. - Change up some KASSERT()s to MPASS()es, and vice-versa, depending on the type of problem we're debugging (INVARIANTS is used here to check that the API is being used properly whereas MUTEX_DEBUG is used to ensure that something general isn't happening that will have bad impact on mutex locks). Reminded by: jhb, jake, asmodai
2001-02-11 02:54:16 +00:00
- Move the MI mutexes sched_lock and Giant from being declared in the various machdep.c's to being declared in kern_mutex.c. - Add a new function mutex_init() used to perform early initialization needed for mutexes such as setting up thread0's contested lock list and initializing MI mutexes. Change the various MD startup routines to call this function instead of duplicating all the code themselves. Tested on: alpha, i386
2002-04-02 22:19:16 +00:00
/*
* System-wide mutexes
*/
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
struct mtx blocked_lock;
- Move the MI mutexes sched_lock and Giant from being declared in the various machdep.c's to being declared in kern_mutex.c. - Add a new function mutex_init() used to perform early initialization needed for mutexes such as setting up thread0's contested lock list and initializing MI mutexes. Change the various MD startup routines to call this function instead of duplicating all the code themselves. Tested on: alpha, i386
2002-04-02 22:19:16 +00:00
struct mtx Giant;
Revert previous commit and add myself to the list of people who should know better than to commit with a cat in the area.
2009-09-08 13:19:05 +00:00
void
Constify arguments for locking KPIs where possible. This enables locking consumers to pass their own structures around as const and be able to assert locks embedded into those structures. Reviewed by: ed, kib, jhb
2011-11-16 21:51:17 +00:00
assert_mtx(const struct lock_object *lock, int what)
Expand lock class with the "virtual" function lc_assert which will offer an unified way for all the lock primitives to express lock assertions. Currenty, lockmgrs and rmlocks don't have assertions, so just panic in that case. This will be a base for more callout improvements. Ok'ed by: jhb, jeff
2007-11-18 14:43:53 +00:00
{
Constify arguments for locking KPIs where possible. This enables locking consumers to pass their own structures around as const and be able to assert locks embedded into those structures. Reviewed by: ed, kib, jhb
2011-11-16 21:51:17 +00:00
mtx_assert((const struct mtx *)lock, what);
Expand lock class with the "virtual" function lc_assert which will offer an unified way for all the lock primitives to express lock assertions. Currenty, lockmgrs and rmlocks don't have assertions, so just panic in that case. This will be a base for more callout improvements. Ok'ed by: jhb, jeff
2007-11-18 14:43:53 +00:00
}
Revert previous commit and add myself to the list of people who should know better than to commit with a cat in the area.
2009-09-08 13:19:05 +00:00
void
Fix lc_lock/lc_unlock() support for rmlocks held in shared mode. With current lock classes KPI it was really difficult because there was no way to pass an rmtracker object to the lock/unlock routines. In order to accomplish the task, modify the aforementioned functions so that they can return (or pass as argument) an uinptr_t, which is in the rm case used to hold a pointer to struct rm_priotracker for current thread. As an added bonus, this fixes rm_sleep() in the rm shared case, which right now can communicate priotracker structure between lc_unlock()/lc_lock(). Suggested by: jhb Reviewed by: jhb Approved by: re (delphij)
2013-09-20 23:06:21 +00:00
lock_mtx(struct lock_object *lock, uintptr_t how)
Add two new function pointers 'lc_lock' and 'lc_unlock' to lock classes. These functions are intended to be used to drop a lock and then reacquire it when doing an sleep such as msleep(9). Both functions accept a 'struct lock_object *' as their first parameter. The 'lc_unlock' function returns an integer that is then passed as the second paramter to the subsequent 'lc_lock' function. This can be used to communicate state. For example, sx locks and rwlocks use this to indicate if the lock was share/read locked vs exclusive/write locked. Currently, spin mutexes and lockmgr locks do not provide working lc_lock and lc_unlock functions.
2007-03-09 16:27:11 +00:00
{
mtx_lock((struct mtx *)lock);
}
Revert previous commit and add myself to the list of people who should know better than to commit with a cat in the area.
2009-09-08 13:19:05 +00:00
void
Fix lc_lock/lc_unlock() support for rmlocks held in shared mode. With current lock classes KPI it was really difficult because there was no way to pass an rmtracker object to the lock/unlock routines. In order to accomplish the task, modify the aforementioned functions so that they can return (or pass as argument) an uinptr_t, which is in the rm case used to hold a pointer to struct rm_priotracker for current thread. As an added bonus, this fixes rm_sleep() in the rm shared case, which right now can communicate priotracker structure between lc_unlock()/lc_lock(). Suggested by: jhb Reviewed by: jhb Approved by: re (delphij)
2013-09-20 23:06:21 +00:00
lock_spin(struct lock_object *lock, uintptr_t how)
Add two new function pointers 'lc_lock' and 'lc_unlock' to lock classes. These functions are intended to be used to drop a lock and then reacquire it when doing an sleep such as msleep(9). Both functions accept a 'struct lock_object *' as their first parameter. The 'lc_unlock' function returns an integer that is then passed as the second paramter to the subsequent 'lc_lock' function. This can be used to communicate state. For example, sx locks and rwlocks use this to indicate if the lock was share/read locked vs exclusive/write locked. Currently, spin mutexes and lockmgr locks do not provide working lc_lock and lc_unlock functions.
2007-03-09 16:27:11 +00:00
{
panic("spin locks can only use msleep_spin");
}
Fix lc_lock/lc_unlock() support for rmlocks held in shared mode. With current lock classes KPI it was really difficult because there was no way to pass an rmtracker object to the lock/unlock routines. In order to accomplish the task, modify the aforementioned functions so that they can return (or pass as argument) an uinptr_t, which is in the rm case used to hold a pointer to struct rm_priotracker for current thread. As an added bonus, this fixes rm_sleep() in the rm shared case, which right now can communicate priotracker structure between lc_unlock()/lc_lock(). Suggested by: jhb Reviewed by: jhb Approved by: re (delphij)
2013-09-20 23:06:21 +00:00
uintptr_t
Add two new function pointers 'lc_lock' and 'lc_unlock' to lock classes. These functions are intended to be used to drop a lock and then reacquire it when doing an sleep such as msleep(9). Both functions accept a 'struct lock_object *' as their first parameter. The 'lc_unlock' function returns an integer that is then passed as the second paramter to the subsequent 'lc_lock' function. This can be used to communicate state. For example, sx locks and rwlocks use this to indicate if the lock was share/read locked vs exclusive/write locked. Currently, spin mutexes and lockmgr locks do not provide working lc_lock and lc_unlock functions.
2007-03-09 16:27:11 +00:00
unlock_mtx(struct lock_object *lock)
{
struct mtx *m;
m = (struct mtx *)lock;
mtx_assert(m, MA_OWNED | MA_NOTRECURSED);
mtx_unlock(m);
return (0);
}
Fix lc_lock/lc_unlock() support for rmlocks held in shared mode. With current lock classes KPI it was really difficult because there was no way to pass an rmtracker object to the lock/unlock routines. In order to accomplish the task, modify the aforementioned functions so that they can return (or pass as argument) an uinptr_t, which is in the rm case used to hold a pointer to struct rm_priotracker for current thread. As an added bonus, this fixes rm_sleep() in the rm shared case, which right now can communicate priotracker structure between lc_unlock()/lc_lock(). Suggested by: jhb Reviewed by: jhb Approved by: re (delphij)
2013-09-20 23:06:21 +00:00
uintptr_t
Add two new function pointers 'lc_lock' and 'lc_unlock' to lock classes. These functions are intended to be used to drop a lock and then reacquire it when doing an sleep such as msleep(9). Both functions accept a 'struct lock_object *' as their first parameter. The 'lc_unlock' function returns an integer that is then passed as the second paramter to the subsequent 'lc_lock' function. This can be used to communicate state. For example, sx locks and rwlocks use this to indicate if the lock was share/read locked vs exclusive/write locked. Currently, spin mutexes and lockmgr locks do not provide working lc_lock and lc_unlock functions.
2007-03-09 16:27:11 +00:00
unlock_spin(struct lock_object *lock)
{
panic("spin locks can only use msleep_spin");
}
Add the OpenSolaris dtrace lockstat provider. The lockstat provider adds probes for mutexes, reader/writer and shared/exclusive locks to gather contention statistics and other locking information for dtrace scripts, the lockstat(1M) command and other potential consumers. Reviewed by: attilio jhb jb Approved by: gnn (mentor)
2009-05-26 20:28:22 +00:00
#ifdef KDTRACE_HOOKS
int
Constify arguments for locking KPIs where possible. This enables locking consumers to pass their own structures around as const and be able to assert locks embedded into those structures. Reviewed by: ed, kib, jhb
2011-11-16 21:51:17 +00:00
owner_mtx(const struct lock_object *lock, struct thread **owner)
Add the OpenSolaris dtrace lockstat provider. The lockstat provider adds probes for mutexes, reader/writer and shared/exclusive locks to gather contention statistics and other locking information for dtrace scripts, the lockstat(1M) command and other potential consumers. Reviewed by: attilio jhb jb Approved by: gnn (mentor)
2009-05-26 20:28:22 +00:00
{
Constify arguments for locking KPIs where possible. This enables locking consumers to pass their own structures around as const and be able to assert locks embedded into those structures. Reviewed by: ed, kib, jhb
2011-11-16 21:51:17 +00:00
const struct mtx *m = (const struct mtx *)lock;
Add the OpenSolaris dtrace lockstat provider. The lockstat provider adds probes for mutexes, reader/writer and shared/exclusive locks to gather contention statistics and other locking information for dtrace scripts, the lockstat(1M) command and other potential consumers. Reviewed by: attilio jhb jb Approved by: gnn (mentor)
2009-05-26 20:28:22 +00:00
*owner = mtx_owner(m);
return (mtx_unowned(m) == 0);
}
#endif
- Switch from using save/disable/restore_intr to using critical_enter/exit and change the u_int mtx_saveintr member of struct mtx to a critical_t mtx_savecrit. - On the alpha we no longer need a custom _get_spin_lock() macro to avoid an extra PAL call, so remove it. - Partially fix using mutexes with WITNESS in modules. Change all the _mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() macros to accept explicit file and line parameters and rename them to use a prefix of two underscores. Inside of kern_mutex.c, generate wrapper functions for _mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() (only using a prefix of one underscore) that are called from modules. The macros mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() are mapped to the __mtx_* macros inside of the kernel to inline the usual case of mutex operations and map to the internal _mtx_* functions in the module case so that modules will use WITNESS and KTR logging if the kernel is compiled with support for it.
2001-03-28 02:40:47 +00:00
/*
* Function versions of the inlined __mtx_* macros. These are used by
* modules and can also be called from assembly language if needed.
*/
void
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
__mtx_lock_flags(volatile uintptr_t *c, int opts, const char *file, int line)
- Switch from using save/disable/restore_intr to using critical_enter/exit and change the u_int mtx_saveintr member of struct mtx to a critical_t mtx_savecrit. - On the alpha we no longer need a custom _get_spin_lock() macro to avoid an extra PAL call, so remove it. - Partially fix using mutexes with WITNESS in modules. Change all the _mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() macros to accept explicit file and line parameters and rename them to use a prefix of two underscores. Inside of kern_mutex.c, generate wrapper functions for _mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() (only using a prefix of one underscore) that are called from modules. The macros mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() are mapped to the __mtx_* macros inside of the kernel to inline the usual case of mutex operations and map to the internal _mtx_* functions in the module case so that modules will use WITNESS and KTR logging if the kernel is compiled with support for it.
2001-03-28 02:40:47 +00:00
{
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
struct mtx *m;
- Switch from using save/disable/restore_intr to using critical_enter/exit and change the u_int mtx_saveintr member of struct mtx to a critical_t mtx_savecrit. - On the alpha we no longer need a custom _get_spin_lock() macro to avoid an extra PAL call, so remove it. - Partially fix using mutexes with WITNESS in modules. Change all the _mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() macros to accept explicit file and line parameters and rename them to use a prefix of two underscores. Inside of kern_mutex.c, generate wrapper functions for _mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() (only using a prefix of one underscore) that are called from modules. The macros mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() are mapped to the __mtx_* macros inside of the kernel to inline the usual case of mutex operations and map to the internal _mtx_* functions in the module case so that modules will use WITNESS and KTR logging if the kernel is compiled with support for it.
2001-03-28 02:40:47 +00:00
panic: add a switch and infrastructure for stopping other CPUs in SMP case Historical behavior of letting other CPUs merily go on is a default for time being. The new behavior can be switched on via kern.stop_scheduler_on_panic tunable and sysctl. Stopping of the CPUs has (at least) the following benefits: - more of the system state at panic time is preserved intact - threads and interrupts do not interfere with dumping of the system state Only one thread runs uninterrupted after panic if stop_scheduler_on_panic is set. That thread might call code that is also used in normal context and that code might use locks to prevent concurrent execution of certain parts. Those locks might be held by the stopped threads and would never be released. To work around this issue, it was decided that instead of explicit checks for panic context, we would rather put those checks inside the locking primitives. This change has substantial portions written and re-written by attilio and kib at various times. Other changes are heavily based on the ideas and patches submitted by jhb and mdf. bde has provided many insights into the details and history of the current code. The new behavior may cause problems for systems that use a USB keyboard for interfacing with system console. This is because of some unusual locking patterns in the ukbd code which have to be used because on one hand ukbd is below syscons, but on the other hand it has to interface with other usb code that uses regular mutexes/Giant for its concurrency protection. Dumping to USB-connected disks may also be affected. PR: amd64/139614 (at least) In cooperation with: attilio, jhb, kib, mdf Discussed with: arch@, bde Tested by: Eugene Grosbein <eugen@grosbein.net>, gnn, Steven Hartland <killing@multiplay.co.uk>, glebius, Andrew Boyer <aboyer@averesystems.com> (various versions of the patch) MFC after: 3 months (or never)
2011-12-11 21:02:01 +00:00
if (SCHEDULER_STOPPED())
return;
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
m = mtxlock2mtx(c);
Fixup r240424: On entering KDB backends, the hijacked thread to run interrupt context can still be idlethread. At that point, without the panic condition, it can still happen that idlethread then will try to acquire some locks to carry on some operations. Skip the idlethread check on block/sleep lock operations when KDB is active. Reported by: jh Tested by: jh MFC after: 1 week
2012-12-22 09:37:34 +00:00
KASSERT(kdb_active != 0 || !TD_IS_IDLETHREAD(curthread),
Improve check coverage about idle threads. Idle threads are not allowed to acquire any lock but spinlocks. Deny any attempt to do so by panicing at the locking operation when INVARIANTS is on. Then, remove the check on blocking on a turnstile. The check in sleepqueues is left because they are not allowed to use tsleep() either which could happen still. Reviewed by: bde, jhb, kib MFC after: 1 week
2012-09-12 22:10:53 +00:00
("mtx_lock() by idle thread %p on sleep mutex %s @ %s:%d",
curthread, m->lock_object.lo_name, file, line));
Write a magic value into mtx_lock when destroying a mutex that will force all other mtx_lock() operations to block. Previously, when the mutex was destroyed, it would still have a valid value in mtx_lock(): either the unowned cookie, which would allow a subsequent mtx_lock() to succeed, or a pointer to the thread who destroyed the mutex if the mutex was locked when it was destroyed. MFC after: 3 days
2006-07-27 19:58:18 +00:00
KASSERT(m->mtx_lock != MTX_DESTROYED,
("mtx_lock() of destroyed mutex @ %s:%d", file, line));
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
KASSERT(LOCK_CLASS(&m->lock_object) == &lock_class_mtx_sleep,
("mtx_lock() of spin mutex %s @ %s:%d", m->lock_object.lo_name,
Add some KASSERT()'s to ensure that we don't perform spin mutex ops on sleep mutexes and vice versa. WITNESS normally should catch this but not everyone uses WITNESS so this is a fallback to catch nasty but easy to do bugs.
2002-09-03 18:25:16 +00:00
file, line));
Give mutex(9) the ability to recurse on a per-instance basis. Now the MTX_RECURSE flag can be passed to the mtx_*_flag() calls. This helps in cases we want to narrow down to specific calls the possibility to recurse for some locks. Sponsored by: EMC / Isilon storage division Reviewed by: jeff, alc Tested by: pho
2013-08-09 11:24:29 +00:00
WITNESS_CHECKORDER(&m->lock_object, (opts & ~MTX_RECURSE) |
LOP_NEWORDER | LOP_EXCLUSIVE, file, line, NULL);
MUTEX_PROFILING has been generalized to LOCK_PROFILING. We now profile wait (time waited to acquire) and hold times for *all* kernel locks. If the architecture has a system synchronized TSC, the profiling code will use that - thereby minimizing profiling overhead. Large chunks of profiling code have been moved out of line, the overhead measured on the T1 for when it is compiled in but not enabled is < 1%. Approved by: scottl (standing in for mentor rwatson) Reviewed by: des and jhb
2006-11-11 03:18:07 +00:00
- Remove <machine/mutex.h>. Most of the headers were empty, and the contents of the ones that were not empty were stale and unused. - Now that <machine/mutex.h> no longer exists, there is no need to allow it to override various helper macros in <sys/mutex.h>. - Rename various helper macros for low-level operations on mutexes to live in the _mtx_* or __mtx_* namespaces. While here, change the names to more closely match the real API functions they are backing. - Drop support for including <sys/mutex.h> in assembly source files. Suggested by: bde (1, 2)
2010-11-09 20:46:41 +00:00
__mtx_lock(m, curthread, opts, file, line);
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
LOCK_LOG_LOCK("LOCK", &m->lock_object, opts, m->mtx_recurse, file,
Since we no longer inline any debugging code in the mutex operations, move all the debugging code into the function versions of the mutex operations in kern_mutex.c. This reduced the __mtx_* macros to simply wrappers of the _{get,rel}_lock_* macros, so the __mtx_* macros were also abolished in favor of just calling the _{get,rel}_lock_* macros. The tangled hairy mass of macros calling macros is at least a bit more sane now.
2001-09-22 21:19:55 +00:00
line);
Give mutex(9) the ability to recurse on a per-instance basis. Now the MTX_RECURSE flag can be passed to the mtx_*_flag() calls. This helps in cases we want to narrow down to specific calls the possibility to recurse for some locks. Sponsored by: EMC / Isilon storage division Reviewed by: jeff, alc Tested by: pho
2013-08-09 11:24:29 +00:00
WITNESS_LOCK(&m->lock_object, (opts & ~MTX_RECURSE) | LOP_EXCLUSIVE,
file, line);
Adjust td_locks for non-spin mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks so that it is a count of all non-spin locks, not just lockmgr locks. This can give us a much cheaper way to see if we have any locks held (such as when returning to userland via userret()) without requiring WITNESS. MFC after: 1 week
2006-07-27 21:45:55 +00:00
curthread->td_locks++;
- Switch from using save/disable/restore_intr to using critical_enter/exit and change the u_int mtx_saveintr member of struct mtx to a critical_t mtx_savecrit. - On the alpha we no longer need a custom _get_spin_lock() macro to avoid an extra PAL call, so remove it. - Partially fix using mutexes with WITNESS in modules. Change all the _mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() macros to accept explicit file and line parameters and rename them to use a prefix of two underscores. Inside of kern_mutex.c, generate wrapper functions for _mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() (only using a prefix of one underscore) that are called from modules. The macros mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() are mapped to the __mtx_* macros inside of the kernel to inline the usual case of mutex operations and map to the internal _mtx_* functions in the module case so that modules will use WITNESS and KTR logging if the kernel is compiled with support for it.
2001-03-28 02:40:47 +00:00
}
void
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
__mtx_unlock_flags(volatile uintptr_t *c, int opts, const char *file, int line)
- Switch from using save/disable/restore_intr to using critical_enter/exit and change the u_int mtx_saveintr member of struct mtx to a critical_t mtx_savecrit. - On the alpha we no longer need a custom _get_spin_lock() macro to avoid an extra PAL call, so remove it. - Partially fix using mutexes with WITNESS in modules. Change all the _mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() macros to accept explicit file and line parameters and rename them to use a prefix of two underscores. Inside of kern_mutex.c, generate wrapper functions for _mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() (only using a prefix of one underscore) that are called from modules. The macros mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() are mapped to the __mtx_* macros inside of the kernel to inline the usual case of mutex operations and map to the internal _mtx_* functions in the module case so that modules will use WITNESS and KTR logging if the kernel is compiled with support for it.
2001-03-28 02:40:47 +00:00
{
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
struct mtx *m;
panic: add a switch and infrastructure for stopping other CPUs in SMP case Historical behavior of letting other CPUs merily go on is a default for time being. The new behavior can be switched on via kern.stop_scheduler_on_panic tunable and sysctl. Stopping of the CPUs has (at least) the following benefits: - more of the system state at panic time is preserved intact - threads and interrupts do not interfere with dumping of the system state Only one thread runs uninterrupted after panic if stop_scheduler_on_panic is set. That thread might call code that is also used in normal context and that code might use locks to prevent concurrent execution of certain parts. Those locks might be held by the stopped threads and would never be released. To work around this issue, it was decided that instead of explicit checks for panic context, we would rather put those checks inside the locking primitives. This change has substantial portions written and re-written by attilio and kib at various times. Other changes are heavily based on the ideas and patches submitted by jhb and mdf. bde has provided many insights into the details and history of the current code. The new behavior may cause problems for systems that use a USB keyboard for interfacing with system console. This is because of some unusual locking patterns in the ukbd code which have to be used because on one hand ukbd is below syscons, but on the other hand it has to interface with other usb code that uses regular mutexes/Giant for its concurrency protection. Dumping to USB-connected disks may also be affected. PR: amd64/139614 (at least) In cooperation with: attilio, jhb, kib, mdf Discussed with: arch@, bde Tested by: Eugene Grosbein <eugen@grosbein.net>, gnn, Steven Hartland <killing@multiplay.co.uk>, glebius, Andrew Boyer <aboyer@averesystems.com> (various versions of the patch) MFC after: 3 months (or never)
2011-12-11 21:02:01 +00:00
if (SCHEDULER_STOPPED())
return;
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
m = mtxlock2mtx(c);
Write a magic value into mtx_lock when destroying a mutex that will force all other mtx_lock() operations to block. Previously, when the mutex was destroyed, it would still have a valid value in mtx_lock(): either the unowned cookie, which would allow a subsequent mtx_lock() to succeed, or a pointer to the thread who destroyed the mutex if the mutex was locked when it was destroyed. MFC after: 3 days
2006-07-27 19:58:18 +00:00
KASSERT(m->mtx_lock != MTX_DESTROYED,
("mtx_unlock() of destroyed mutex @ %s:%d", file, line));
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
KASSERT(LOCK_CLASS(&m->lock_object) == &lock_class_mtx_sleep,
("mtx_unlock() of spin mutex %s @ %s:%d", m->lock_object.lo_name,
Add some KASSERT()'s to ensure that we don't perform spin mutex ops on sleep mutexes and vice versa. WITNESS normally should catch this but not everyone uses WITNESS so this is a fallback to catch nasty but easy to do bugs.
2002-09-03 18:25:16 +00:00
file, line));
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
WITNESS_UNLOCK(&m->lock_object, opts | LOP_EXCLUSIVE, file, line);
LOCK_LOG_LOCK("UNLOCK", &m->lock_object, opts, m->mtx_recurse, file,
Add some KASSERT()'s to ensure that we don't perform spin mutex ops on sleep mutexes and vice versa. WITNESS normally should catch this but not everyone uses WITNESS so this is a fallback to catch nasty but easy to do bugs.
2002-09-03 18:25:16 +00:00
line);
Remove superflous parens after de-macroizing.
2001-09-26 00:05:18 +00:00
mtx_assert(m, MA_OWNED);
lock stats updates need to be protected by the lock
2007-03-02 07:21:20 +00:00
- Remove <machine/mutex.h>. Most of the headers were empty, and the contents of the ones that were not empty were stale and unused. - Now that <machine/mutex.h> no longer exists, there is no need to allow it to override various helper macros in <sys/mutex.h>. - Rename various helper macros for low-level operations on mutexes to live in the _mtx_* or __mtx_* namespaces. While here, change the names to more closely match the real API functions they are backing. - Drop support for including <sys/mutex.h> in assembly source files. Suggested by: bde (1, 2)
2010-11-09 20:46:41 +00:00
__mtx_unlock(m, curthread, opts, file, line);
A few mostly cosmetic nits to aid in debugging: - Call lock_init() first before setting any lock_object fields in lock init routines. This way if the machine panics due to a duplicate init the lock's original state is preserved. - Somewhat similarly, don't decrement td_locks and td_slocks until after an unlock operation has completed successfully.
2013-06-25 20:23:08 +00:00
curthread->td_locks--;
- Switch from using save/disable/restore_intr to using critical_enter/exit and change the u_int mtx_saveintr member of struct mtx to a critical_t mtx_savecrit. - On the alpha we no longer need a custom _get_spin_lock() macro to avoid an extra PAL call, so remove it. - Partially fix using mutexes with WITNESS in modules. Change all the _mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() macros to accept explicit file and line parameters and rename them to use a prefix of two underscores. Inside of kern_mutex.c, generate wrapper functions for _mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() (only using a prefix of one underscore) that are called from modules. The macros mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() are mapped to the __mtx_* macros inside of the kernel to inline the usual case of mutex operations and map to the internal _mtx_* functions in the module case so that modules will use WITNESS and KTR logging if the kernel is compiled with support for it.
2001-03-28 02:40:47 +00:00
}
void
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
__mtx_lock_spin_flags(volatile uintptr_t *c, int opts, const char *file,
int line)
- Switch from using save/disable/restore_intr to using critical_enter/exit and change the u_int mtx_saveintr member of struct mtx to a critical_t mtx_savecrit. - On the alpha we no longer need a custom _get_spin_lock() macro to avoid an extra PAL call, so remove it. - Partially fix using mutexes with WITNESS in modules. Change all the _mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() macros to accept explicit file and line parameters and rename them to use a prefix of two underscores. Inside of kern_mutex.c, generate wrapper functions for _mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() (only using a prefix of one underscore) that are called from modules. The macros mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() are mapped to the __mtx_* macros inside of the kernel to inline the usual case of mutex operations and map to the internal _mtx_* functions in the module case so that modules will use WITNESS and KTR logging if the kernel is compiled with support for it.
2001-03-28 02:40:47 +00:00
{
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
struct mtx *m;
Add KASSERT()'s to catch attempts to recurse on spin mutexes that aren't marked recursable either via mtx_lock_spin() or thread_lock(). MFC after: 1 week
2008-02-13 23:39:05 +00:00
panic: add a switch and infrastructure for stopping other CPUs in SMP case Historical behavior of letting other CPUs merily go on is a default for time being. The new behavior can be switched on via kern.stop_scheduler_on_panic tunable and sysctl. Stopping of the CPUs has (at least) the following benefits: - more of the system state at panic time is preserved intact - threads and interrupts do not interfere with dumping of the system state Only one thread runs uninterrupted after panic if stop_scheduler_on_panic is set. That thread might call code that is also used in normal context and that code might use locks to prevent concurrent execution of certain parts. Those locks might be held by the stopped threads and would never be released. To work around this issue, it was decided that instead of explicit checks for panic context, we would rather put those checks inside the locking primitives. This change has substantial portions written and re-written by attilio and kib at various times. Other changes are heavily based on the ideas and patches submitted by jhb and mdf. bde has provided many insights into the details and history of the current code. The new behavior may cause problems for systems that use a USB keyboard for interfacing with system console. This is because of some unusual locking patterns in the ukbd code which have to be used because on one hand ukbd is below syscons, but on the other hand it has to interface with other usb code that uses regular mutexes/Giant for its concurrency protection. Dumping to USB-connected disks may also be affected. PR: amd64/139614 (at least) In cooperation with: attilio, jhb, kib, mdf Discussed with: arch@, bde Tested by: Eugene Grosbein <eugen@grosbein.net>, gnn, Steven Hartland <killing@multiplay.co.uk>, glebius, Andrew Boyer <aboyer@averesystems.com> (various versions of the patch) MFC after: 3 months (or never)
2011-12-11 21:02:01 +00:00
if (SCHEDULER_STOPPED())
return;
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
m = mtxlock2mtx(c);
Write a magic value into mtx_lock when destroying a mutex that will force all other mtx_lock() operations to block. Previously, when the mutex was destroyed, it would still have a valid value in mtx_lock(): either the unowned cookie, which would allow a subsequent mtx_lock() to succeed, or a pointer to the thread who destroyed the mutex if the mutex was locked when it was destroyed. MFC after: 3 days
2006-07-27 19:58:18 +00:00
KASSERT(m->mtx_lock != MTX_DESTROYED,
("mtx_lock_spin() of destroyed mutex @ %s:%d", file, line));
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
KASSERT(LOCK_CLASS(&m->lock_object) == &lock_class_mtx_spin,
Add some KASSERT()'s to ensure that we don't perform spin mutex ops on sleep mutexes and vice versa. WITNESS normally should catch this but not everyone uses WITNESS so this is a fallback to catch nasty but easy to do bugs.
2002-09-03 18:25:16 +00:00
("mtx_lock_spin() of sleep mutex %s @ %s:%d",
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
m->lock_object.lo_name, file, line));
Add KASSERT()'s to catch attempts to recurse on spin mutexes that aren't marked recursable either via mtx_lock_spin() or thread_lock(). MFC after: 1 week
2008-02-13 23:39:05 +00:00
if (mtx_owned(m))
Give mutex(9) the ability to recurse on a per-instance basis. Now the MTX_RECURSE flag can be passed to the mtx_*_flag() calls. This helps in cases we want to narrow down to specific calls the possibility to recurse for some locks. Sponsored by: EMC / Isilon storage division Reviewed by: jeff, alc Tested by: pho
2013-08-09 11:24:29 +00:00
KASSERT((m->lock_object.lo_flags & LO_RECURSABLE) != 0 ||
(opts & MTX_RECURSE) != 0,
Add KASSERT()'s to catch attempts to recurse on spin mutexes that aren't marked recursable either via mtx_lock_spin() or thread_lock(). MFC after: 1 week
2008-02-13 23:39:05 +00:00
("mtx_lock_spin: recursed on non-recursive mutex %s @ %s:%d\n",
m->lock_object.lo_name, file, line));
Give mutex(9) the ability to recurse on a per-instance basis. Now the MTX_RECURSE flag can be passed to the mtx_*_flag() calls. This helps in cases we want to narrow down to specific calls the possibility to recurse for some locks. Sponsored by: EMC / Isilon storage division Reviewed by: jeff, alc Tested by: pho
2013-08-09 11:24:29 +00:00
opts &= ~MTX_RECURSE;
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
WITNESS_CHECKORDER(&m->lock_object, opts | LOP_NEWORDER | LOP_EXCLUSIVE,
Teach WITNESS about the interlocks used with lockmgr. This removes a bunch of spurious witness warnings since lockmgr grew witness support. Before this, every time you passed an interlock to a lockmgr lock WITNESS treated it as a LOR. Reviewed by: attilio
2008-09-10 19:13:30 +00:00
file, line, NULL);
- Remove <machine/mutex.h>. Most of the headers were empty, and the contents of the ones that were not empty were stale and unused. - Now that <machine/mutex.h> no longer exists, there is no need to allow it to override various helper macros in <sys/mutex.h>. - Rename various helper macros for low-level operations on mutexes to live in the _mtx_* or __mtx_* namespaces. While here, change the names to more closely match the real API functions they are backing. - Drop support for including <sys/mutex.h> in assembly source files. Suggested by: bde (1, 2)
2010-11-09 20:46:41 +00:00
__mtx_lock_spin(m, curthread, opts, file, line);
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
LOCK_LOG_LOCK("LOCK", &m->lock_object, opts, m->mtx_recurse, file,
Since we no longer inline any debugging code in the mutex operations, move all the debugging code into the function versions of the mutex operations in kern_mutex.c. This reduced the __mtx_* macros to simply wrappers of the _{get,rel}_lock_* macros, so the __mtx_* macros were also abolished in favor of just calling the _{get,rel}_lock_* macros. The tangled hairy mass of macros calling macros is at least a bit more sane now.
2001-09-22 21:19:55 +00:00
line);
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
WITNESS_LOCK(&m->lock_object, opts | LOP_EXCLUSIVE, file, line);
- Switch from using save/disable/restore_intr to using critical_enter/exit and change the u_int mtx_saveintr member of struct mtx to a critical_t mtx_savecrit. - On the alpha we no longer need a custom _get_spin_lock() macro to avoid an extra PAL call, so remove it. - Partially fix using mutexes with WITNESS in modules. Change all the _mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() macros to accept explicit file and line parameters and rename them to use a prefix of two underscores. Inside of kern_mutex.c, generate wrapper functions for _mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() (only using a prefix of one underscore) that are called from modules. The macros mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() are mapped to the __mtx_* macros inside of the kernel to inline the usual case of mutex operations and map to the internal _mtx_* functions in the module case so that modules will use WITNESS and KTR logging if the kernel is compiled with support for it.
2001-03-28 02:40:47 +00:00
}
void
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
__mtx_unlock_spin_flags(volatile uintptr_t *c, int opts, const char *file,
int line)
- Switch from using save/disable/restore_intr to using critical_enter/exit and change the u_int mtx_saveintr member of struct mtx to a critical_t mtx_savecrit. - On the alpha we no longer need a custom _get_spin_lock() macro to avoid an extra PAL call, so remove it. - Partially fix using mutexes with WITNESS in modules. Change all the _mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() macros to accept explicit file and line parameters and rename them to use a prefix of two underscores. Inside of kern_mutex.c, generate wrapper functions for _mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() (only using a prefix of one underscore) that are called from modules. The macros mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() are mapped to the __mtx_* macros inside of the kernel to inline the usual case of mutex operations and map to the internal _mtx_* functions in the module case so that modules will use WITNESS and KTR logging if the kernel is compiled with support for it.
2001-03-28 02:40:47 +00:00
{
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
struct mtx *m;
lock stats updates need to be protected by the lock
2007-03-02 07:21:20 +00:00
panic: add a switch and infrastructure for stopping other CPUs in SMP case Historical behavior of letting other CPUs merily go on is a default for time being. The new behavior can be switched on via kern.stop_scheduler_on_panic tunable and sysctl. Stopping of the CPUs has (at least) the following benefits: - more of the system state at panic time is preserved intact - threads and interrupts do not interfere with dumping of the system state Only one thread runs uninterrupted after panic if stop_scheduler_on_panic is set. That thread might call code that is also used in normal context and that code might use locks to prevent concurrent execution of certain parts. Those locks might be held by the stopped threads and would never be released. To work around this issue, it was decided that instead of explicit checks for panic context, we would rather put those checks inside the locking primitives. This change has substantial portions written and re-written by attilio and kib at various times. Other changes are heavily based on the ideas and patches submitted by jhb and mdf. bde has provided many insights into the details and history of the current code. The new behavior may cause problems for systems that use a USB keyboard for interfacing with system console. This is because of some unusual locking patterns in the ukbd code which have to be used because on one hand ukbd is below syscons, but on the other hand it has to interface with other usb code that uses regular mutexes/Giant for its concurrency protection. Dumping to USB-connected disks may also be affected. PR: amd64/139614 (at least) In cooperation with: attilio, jhb, kib, mdf Discussed with: arch@, bde Tested by: Eugene Grosbein <eugen@grosbein.net>, gnn, Steven Hartland <killing@multiplay.co.uk>, glebius, Andrew Boyer <aboyer@averesystems.com> (various versions of the patch) MFC after: 3 months (or never)
2011-12-11 21:02:01 +00:00
if (SCHEDULER_STOPPED())
return;
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
m = mtxlock2mtx(c);
Write a magic value into mtx_lock when destroying a mutex that will force all other mtx_lock() operations to block. Previously, when the mutex was destroyed, it would still have a valid value in mtx_lock(): either the unowned cookie, which would allow a subsequent mtx_lock() to succeed, or a pointer to the thread who destroyed the mutex if the mutex was locked when it was destroyed. MFC after: 3 days
2006-07-27 19:58:18 +00:00
KASSERT(m->mtx_lock != MTX_DESTROYED,
("mtx_unlock_spin() of destroyed mutex @ %s:%d", file, line));
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
KASSERT(LOCK_CLASS(&m->lock_object) == &lock_class_mtx_spin,
Add some KASSERT()'s to ensure that we don't perform spin mutex ops on sleep mutexes and vice versa. WITNESS normally should catch this but not everyone uses WITNESS so this is a fallback to catch nasty but easy to do bugs.
2002-09-03 18:25:16 +00:00
("mtx_unlock_spin() of sleep mutex %s @ %s:%d",
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
m->lock_object.lo_name, file, line));
WITNESS_UNLOCK(&m->lock_object, opts | LOP_EXCLUSIVE, file, line);
LOCK_LOG_LOCK("UNLOCK", &m->lock_object, opts, m->mtx_recurse, file,
Since we no longer inline any debugging code in the mutex operations, move all the debugging code into the function versions of the mutex operations in kern_mutex.c. This reduced the __mtx_* macros to simply wrappers of the _{get,rel}_lock_* macros, so the __mtx_* macros were also abolished in favor of just calling the _{get,rel}_lock_* macros. The tangled hairy mass of macros calling macros is at least a bit more sane now.
2001-09-22 21:19:55 +00:00
line);
Add some KASSERT()'s to ensure that we don't perform spin mutex ops on sleep mutexes and vice versa. WITNESS normally should catch this but not everyone uses WITNESS so this is a fallback to catch nasty but easy to do bugs.
2002-09-03 18:25:16 +00:00
mtx_assert(m, MA_OWNED);
lock stats updates need to be protected by the lock
2007-03-02 07:21:20 +00:00
- Remove <machine/mutex.h>. Most of the headers were empty, and the contents of the ones that were not empty were stale and unused. - Now that <machine/mutex.h> no longer exists, there is no need to allow it to override various helper macros in <sys/mutex.h>. - Rename various helper macros for low-level operations on mutexes to live in the _mtx_* or __mtx_* namespaces. While here, change the names to more closely match the real API functions they are backing. - Drop support for including <sys/mutex.h> in assembly source files. Suggested by: bde (1, 2)
2010-11-09 20:46:41 +00:00
__mtx_unlock_spin(m);
- Switch from using save/disable/restore_intr to using critical_enter/exit and change the u_int mtx_saveintr member of struct mtx to a critical_t mtx_savecrit. - On the alpha we no longer need a custom _get_spin_lock() macro to avoid an extra PAL call, so remove it. - Partially fix using mutexes with WITNESS in modules. Change all the _mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() macros to accept explicit file and line parameters and rename them to use a prefix of two underscores. Inside of kern_mutex.c, generate wrapper functions for _mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() (only using a prefix of one underscore) that are called from modules. The macros mtx_{un,}lock_{spin,}_flags() are mapped to the __mtx_* macros inside of the kernel to inline the usual case of mutex operations and map to the internal _mtx_* functions in the module case so that modules will use WITNESS and KTR logging if the kernel is compiled with support for it.
2001-03-28 02:40:47 +00:00
}
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
/*
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
* The important part of mtx_trylock{,_flags}()
- Allow mtx_trylock() to recurse on a recursive mutex. Attempts to recurse on a non-recursive mutex will fail but will not trigger any assertions. - Add an assertion to mtx_lock() that one never recurses on a non-recursive mutex. This is mostly useful for the non-WITNESS case. Requested by: deischen, julian, others (1)
2004-01-05 23:09:51 +00:00
* Tries to acquire lock `m.' If this function is called on a mutex that
* is already owned, it will recursively acquire the lock.
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
*/
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
int
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
_mtx_trylock_flags_(volatile uintptr_t *c, int opts, const char *file, int line)
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
{
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
struct mtx *m;
- Wrap lock profiling state variables in #ifdef LOCK_PROFILING blocks.
2009-03-15 08:03:54 +00:00
#ifdef LOCK_PROFILING
MUTEX_PROFILING has been generalized to LOCK_PROFILING. We now profile wait (time waited to acquire) and hold times for *all* kernel locks. If the architecture has a system synchronized TSC, the profiling code will use that - thereby minimizing profiling overhead. Large chunks of profiling code have been moved out of line, the overhead measured on the T1 for when it is compiled in but not enabled is < 1%. Approved by: scottl (standing in for mentor rwatson) Reviewed by: des and jhb
2006-11-11 03:18:07 +00:00
uint64_t waittime = 0;
- Wrap lock profiling state variables in #ifdef LOCK_PROFILING blocks.
2009-03-15 08:03:54 +00:00
int contested = 0;
#endif
int rval;
Various whitespace fixes.
2008-09-10 17:59:21 +00:00
panic: add a switch and infrastructure for stopping other CPUs in SMP case Historical behavior of letting other CPUs merily go on is a default for time being. The new behavior can be switched on via kern.stop_scheduler_on_panic tunable and sysctl. Stopping of the CPUs has (at least) the following benefits: - more of the system state at panic time is preserved intact - threads and interrupts do not interfere with dumping of the system state Only one thread runs uninterrupted after panic if stop_scheduler_on_panic is set. That thread might call code that is also used in normal context and that code might use locks to prevent concurrent execution of certain parts. Those locks might be held by the stopped threads and would never be released. To work around this issue, it was decided that instead of explicit checks for panic context, we would rather put those checks inside the locking primitives. This change has substantial portions written and re-written by attilio and kib at various times. Other changes are heavily based on the ideas and patches submitted by jhb and mdf. bde has provided many insights into the details and history of the current code. The new behavior may cause problems for systems that use a USB keyboard for interfacing with system console. This is because of some unusual locking patterns in the ukbd code which have to be used because on one hand ukbd is below syscons, but on the other hand it has to interface with other usb code that uses regular mutexes/Giant for its concurrency protection. Dumping to USB-connected disks may also be affected. PR: amd64/139614 (at least) In cooperation with: attilio, jhb, kib, mdf Discussed with: arch@, bde Tested by: Eugene Grosbein <eugen@grosbein.net>, gnn, Steven Hartland <killing@multiplay.co.uk>, glebius, Andrew Boyer <aboyer@averesystems.com> (various versions of the patch) MFC after: 3 months (or never)
2011-12-11 21:02:01 +00:00
if (SCHEDULER_STOPPED())
return (1);
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
m = mtxlock2mtx(c);
Fixup r240424: On entering KDB backends, the hijacked thread to run interrupt context can still be idlethread. At that point, without the panic condition, it can still happen that idlethread then will try to acquire some locks to carry on some operations. Skip the idlethread check on block/sleep lock operations when KDB is active. Reported by: jh Tested by: jh MFC after: 1 week
2012-12-22 09:37:34 +00:00
KASSERT(kdb_active != 0 || !TD_IS_IDLETHREAD(curthread),
Improve check coverage about idle threads. Idle threads are not allowed to acquire any lock but spinlocks. Deny any attempt to do so by panicing at the locking operation when INVARIANTS is on. Then, remove the check on blocking on a turnstile. The check in sleepqueues is left because they are not allowed to use tsleep() either which could happen still. Reviewed by: bde, jhb, kib MFC after: 1 week
2012-09-12 22:10:53 +00:00
("mtx_trylock() by idle thread %p on sleep mutex %s @ %s:%d",
curthread, m->lock_object.lo_name, file, line));
Write a magic value into mtx_lock when destroying a mutex that will force all other mtx_lock() operations to block. Previously, when the mutex was destroyed, it would still have a valid value in mtx_lock(): either the unowned cookie, which would allow a subsequent mtx_lock() to succeed, or a pointer to the thread who destroyed the mutex if the mutex was locked when it was destroyed. MFC after: 3 days
2006-07-27 19:58:18 +00:00
KASSERT(m->mtx_lock != MTX_DESTROYED,
("mtx_trylock() of destroyed mutex @ %s:%d", file, line));
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
KASSERT(LOCK_CLASS(&m->lock_object) == &lock_class_mtx_sleep,
("mtx_trylock() of spin mutex %s @ %s:%d", m->lock_object.lo_name,
- Add an assertion to panic if one tries to call mtx_trylock() on a spin mutex. - Don't panic if a spin lock is held too long inside _mtx_lock_spin() if panicstr is set (meaning that we are already in a panic). Just keep spinning forever instead.
2005-09-02 20:21:49 +00:00
file, line));
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
Give mutex(9) the ability to recurse on a per-instance basis. Now the MTX_RECURSE flag can be passed to the mtx_*_flag() calls. This helps in cases we want to narrow down to specific calls the possibility to recurse for some locks. Sponsored by: EMC / Isilon storage division Reviewed by: jeff, alc Tested by: pho
2013-08-09 11:24:29 +00:00
if (mtx_owned(m) && ((m->lock_object.lo_flags & LO_RECURSABLE) != 0 ||
(opts & MTX_RECURSE) != 0)) {
- Allow mtx_trylock() to recurse on a recursive mutex. Attempts to recurse on a non-recursive mutex will fail but will not trigger any assertions. - Add an assertion to mtx_lock() that one never recurses on a non-recursive mutex. This is mostly useful for the non-WITNESS case. Requested by: deischen, julian, others (1)
2004-01-05 23:09:51 +00:00
m->mtx_recurse++;
atomic_set_ptr(&m->mtx_lock, MTX_RECURSED);
rval = 1;
} else
- Remove <machine/mutex.h>. Most of the headers were empty, and the contents of the ones that were not empty were stale and unused. - Now that <machine/mutex.h> no longer exists, there is no need to allow it to override various helper macros in <sys/mutex.h>. - Rename various helper macros for low-level operations on mutexes to live in the _mtx_* or __mtx_* namespaces. While here, change the names to more closely match the real API functions they are backing. - Drop support for including <sys/mutex.h> in assembly source files. Suggested by: bde (1, 2)
2010-11-09 20:46:41 +00:00
rval = _mtx_obtain_lock(m, (uintptr_t)curthread);
Give mutex(9) the ability to recurse on a per-instance basis. Now the MTX_RECURSE flag can be passed to the mtx_*_flag() calls. This helps in cases we want to narrow down to specific calls the possibility to recurse for some locks. Sponsored by: EMC / Isilon storage division Reviewed by: jeff, alc Tested by: pho
2013-08-09 11:24:29 +00:00
opts &= ~MTX_RECURSE;
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
LOCK_LOG_TRY("LOCK", &m->lock_object, opts, rval, file, line);
Adjust td_locks for non-spin mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks so that it is a count of all non-spin locks, not just lockmgr locks. This can give us a much cheaper way to see if we have any locks held (such as when returning to userland via userret()) without requiring WITNESS. MFC after: 1 week
2006-07-27 21:45:55 +00:00
if (rval) {
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
WITNESS_LOCK(&m->lock_object, opts | LOP_EXCLUSIVE | LOP_TRYLOCK,
- Move state about lock objects out of struct lock_object and into a new struct lock_instance that is stored in the per-process and per-CPU lock lists. Previously, the lock lists just kept a pointer to each lock held. That pointer is now replaced by a lock instance which contains a pointer to the lock object, the file and line of the last acquisition of a lock, and various flags about a lock including its recursion count. - If we sleep while holding a sleepable lock, then mark that lock instance as having slept and ignore any lock order violations that occur while acquiring Giant when we wake up with slept locks. This is ok because of Giant's special nature. - Allow witness to differentiate between shared and exclusive locks and unlocks of a lock. Witness will now detect the case when a lock is acquired first in one mode and then in another. Mutexes are always locked and unlocked exclusively. Witness will also now detect the case where a process attempts to unlock a shared lock while holding an exclusive lock and vice versa. - Fix a bug in the lock list implementation where we used the wrong constant to detect the case where a lock list entry was full.
2001-05-04 17:15:16 +00:00
file, line);
Adjust td_locks for non-spin mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks so that it is a count of all non-spin locks, not just lockmgr locks. This can give us a much cheaper way to see if we have any locks held (such as when returning to userland via userret()) without requiring WITNESS. MFC after: 1 week
2006-07-27 21:45:55 +00:00
curthread->td_locks++;
general LOCK_PROFILING cleanup - only collect timestamps when a lock is contested - this reduces the overhead of collecting profiles from 20x to 5x - remove unused function from subr_lock.c - generalize cnt_hold and cnt_lock statistics to be kept for all locks - NOTE: rwlock profiling generates invalid statistics (and most likely always has) someone familiar with that should review
2007-02-26 08:26:44 +00:00
if (m->mtx_recurse == 0)
Add the OpenSolaris dtrace lockstat provider. The lockstat provider adds probes for mutexes, reader/writer and shared/exclusive locks to gather contention statistics and other locking information for dtrace scripts, the lockstat(1M) command and other potential consumers. Reviewed by: attilio jhb jb Approved by: gnn (mentor)
2009-05-26 20:28:22 +00:00
LOCKSTAT_PROFILE_OBTAIN_LOCK_SUCCESS(LS_MTX_LOCK_ACQUIRE,
m, contested, waittime, file, line);
MUTEX_PROFILING has been generalized to LOCK_PROFILING. We now profile wait (time waited to acquire) and hold times for *all* kernel locks. If the architecture has a system synchronized TSC, the profiling code will use that - thereby minimizing profiling overhead. Large chunks of profiling code have been moved out of line, the overhead measured on the T1 for when it is compiled in but not enabled is < 1%. Approved by: scottl (standing in for mentor rwatson) Reviewed by: des and jhb
2006-11-11 03:18:07 +00:00
Adjust td_locks for non-spin mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks so that it is a count of all non-spin locks, not just lockmgr locks. This can give us a much cheaper way to see if we have any locks held (such as when returning to userland via userret()) without requiring WITNESS. MFC after: 1 week
2006-07-27 21:45:55 +00:00
}
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
Rework the witness code to work with sx locks as well as mutexes. - Introduce lock classes and lock objects. Each lock class specifies a name and set of flags (or properties) shared by all locks of a given type. Currently there are three lock classes: spin mutexes, sleep mutexes, and sx locks. A lock object specifies properties of an additional lock along with a lock name and all of the extra stuff needed to make witness work with a given lock. This abstract lock stuff is defined in sys/lock.h. The lockmgr constants, types, and prototypes have been moved to sys/lockmgr.h. For temporary backwards compatability, sys/lock.h includes sys/lockmgr.h. - Replace proc->p_spinlocks with a per-CPU list, PCPU(spinlocks), of spin locks held. By making this per-cpu, we do not have to jump through magic hoops to deal with sched_lock changing ownership during context switches. - Replace proc->p_heldmtx, formerly a list of held sleep mutexes, with proc->p_sleeplocks, which is a list of held sleep locks including sleep mutexes and sx locks. - Add helper macros for logging lock events via the KTR_LOCK KTR logging level so that the log messages are consistent. - Add some new flags that can be passed to mtx_init(): - MTX_NOWITNESS - specifies that this lock should be ignored by witness. This is used for the mutex that blocks a sx lock for example. - MTX_QUIET - this is not new, but you can pass this to mtx_init() now and no events will be logged for this lock, so that one doesn't have to change all the individual mtx_lock/unlock() operations. - All lock objects maintain an initialized flag. Use this flag to export a mtx_initialized() macro that can be safely called from drivers. Also, we on longer walk the all_mtx list if MUTEX_DEBUG is defined as witness performs the corresponding checks using the initialized flag. - The lock order reversal messages have been improved to output slightly more accurate file and line numbers.
2001-03-28 09:03:24 +00:00
return (rval);
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
}
/*
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
* __mtx_lock_sleep: the tougher part of acquiring an MTX_DEF lock.
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
*
* We call this if the lock is either contested (i.e. we need to go to
* sleep waiting for it), or if we need to recurse on it.
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
*/
void
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
__mtx_lock_sleep(volatile uintptr_t *c, uintptr_t tid, int opts,
const char *file, int line)
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
{
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
struct mtx *m;
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
struct turnstile *ts;
- Wrap lock profiling state variables in #ifdef LOCK_PROFILING blocks.
2009-03-15 08:03:54 +00:00
uintptr_t v;
- Simplify the #ifdef's for adaptive mutexes and rwlocks by conditionally defining a macro earlier in the file. - Add NO_ADAPTIVE_RWLOCKS option to disable adaptive spinning for rwlocks.
2007-03-22 16:09:23 +00:00
#ifdef ADAPTIVE_MUTEXES
Mark the thread pointer used during an adaptive spin volatile so that the compiler doesn't decide to cache td_state. Cachine the state would cause the spinning thread to not notice when the owning thread stopped executing (if it was preempted for example) which could result in livelock.
2006-04-14 19:51:50 +00:00
volatile struct thread *owner;
Add code to make default mutexes adaptive if the ADAPTIVE_MUTEXES kernel option is used (not on by default). - In the case of trying to lock a mutex, if the MTX_CONTESTED flag is set, then we can safely read the thread pointer from the mtx_lock member while holding sched_lock. We then examine the thread to see if it is currently executing on another CPU. If it is, then we keep looping instead of blocking. - In the case of trying to unlock a mutex, it is now possible for a mutex to have MTX_CONTESTED set in mtx_lock but to not have any threads actually blocked on it, so we need to handle that case. In that case, we just release the lock as if MTX_CONTESTED was not set and return. - We do not adaptively spin on Giant as Giant is held for long times and it slows SMP systems down to a crawl (it was taking several minutes, like 5-10 or so for my test alpha and sparc64 SMP boxes to boot up when they adaptively spinned on Giant). - We only compile in the code to do this for SMP kernels, it doesn't make sense for UP kernels. Tested on: i386, alpha, sparc64
2002-05-21 20:47:11 +00:00
#endif
Add a new KTR type KTR_CONTENTION, and use it in the mutex code to log the start and end of periods during which mtx_lock() is waiting to acquire a sleep mutex. The log message includes the file and line of both the waiter and the holder. Reviewed by: jhb, jake
2002-08-26 18:39:38 +00:00
#ifdef KTR
int cont_logged = 0;
#endif
- Wrap lock profiling state variables in #ifdef LOCK_PROFILING blocks.
2009-03-15 08:03:54 +00:00
#ifdef LOCK_PROFILING
move lock_profile calls out of the macros and into kern_mutex.c add check for mtx_recurse == 0 when releasing sleep lock
2007-04-03 22:52:31 +00:00
int contested = 0;
uint64_t waittime = 0;
- Wrap lock profiling state variables in #ifdef LOCK_PROFILING blocks.
2009-03-15 08:03:54 +00:00
#endif
Add the OpenSolaris dtrace lockstat provider. The lockstat provider adds probes for mutexes, reader/writer and shared/exclusive locks to gather contention statistics and other locking information for dtrace scripts, the lockstat(1M) command and other potential consumers. Reviewed by: attilio jhb jb Approved by: gnn (mentor)
2009-05-26 20:28:22 +00:00
#ifdef KDTRACE_HOOKS
uint64_t spin_cnt = 0;
uint64_t sleep_cnt = 0;
int64_t sleep_time = 0;
#endif
Various whitespace fixes.
2008-09-10 17:59:21 +00:00
panic: add a switch and infrastructure for stopping other CPUs in SMP case Historical behavior of letting other CPUs merily go on is a default for time being. The new behavior can be switched on via kern.stop_scheduler_on_panic tunable and sysctl. Stopping of the CPUs has (at least) the following benefits: - more of the system state at panic time is preserved intact - threads and interrupts do not interfere with dumping of the system state Only one thread runs uninterrupted after panic if stop_scheduler_on_panic is set. That thread might call code that is also used in normal context and that code might use locks to prevent concurrent execution of certain parts. Those locks might be held by the stopped threads and would never be released. To work around this issue, it was decided that instead of explicit checks for panic context, we would rather put those checks inside the locking primitives. This change has substantial portions written and re-written by attilio and kib at various times. Other changes are heavily based on the ideas and patches submitted by jhb and mdf. bde has provided many insights into the details and history of the current code. The new behavior may cause problems for systems that use a USB keyboard for interfacing with system console. This is because of some unusual locking patterns in the ukbd code which have to be used because on one hand ukbd is below syscons, but on the other hand it has to interface with other usb code that uses regular mutexes/Giant for its concurrency protection. Dumping to USB-connected disks may also be affected. PR: amd64/139614 (at least) In cooperation with: attilio, jhb, kib, mdf Discussed with: arch@, bde Tested by: Eugene Grosbein <eugen@grosbein.net>, gnn, Steven Hartland <killing@multiplay.co.uk>, glebius, Andrew Boyer <aboyer@averesystems.com> (various versions of the patch) MFC after: 3 months (or never)
2011-12-11 21:02:01 +00:00
if (SCHEDULER_STOPPED())
return;
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
m = mtxlock2mtx(c);
Miscellaneous cleanups to _mtx_lock_sleep(): - Declare some local variables at the top of the function instead of in a nested block. - Use mtx_owned() instead of masking off bits from mtx_lock manually. - Read the value of mtx_lock into 'v' as a separate line rather than inside an if statement for clarity. This code is hairy enough as it is.
2003-03-04 20:32:41 +00:00
if (mtx_owned(m)) {
Give mutex(9) the ability to recurse on a per-instance basis. Now the MTX_RECURSE flag can be passed to the mtx_*_flag() calls. This helps in cases we want to narrow down to specific calls the possibility to recurse for some locks. Sponsored by: EMC / Isilon storage division Reviewed by: jeff, alc Tested by: pho
2013-08-09 11:24:29 +00:00
KASSERT((m->lock_object.lo_flags & LO_RECURSABLE) != 0 ||
(opts & MTX_RECURSE) != 0,
- Allow mtx_trylock() to recurse on a recursive mutex. Attempts to recurse on a non-recursive mutex will fail but will not trigger any assertions. - Add an assertion to mtx_lock() that one never recurses on a non-recursive mutex. This is mostly useful for the non-WITNESS case. Requested by: deischen, julian, others (1)
2004-01-05 23:09:51 +00:00
("_mtx_lock_sleep: recursed on non-recursive mutex %s @ %s:%d\n",
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
m->lock_object.lo_name, file, line));
Give mutex(9) the ability to recurse on a per-instance basis. Now the MTX_RECURSE flag can be passed to the mtx_*_flag() calls. This helps in cases we want to narrow down to specific calls the possibility to recurse for some locks. Sponsored by: EMC / Isilon storage division Reviewed by: jeff, alc Tested by: pho
2013-08-09 11:24:29 +00:00
opts &= ~MTX_RECURSE;
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
m->mtx_recurse++;
atomic_set_ptr(&m->mtx_lock, MTX_RECURSED);
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
if (LOCK_LOG_TEST(&m->lock_object, opts))
- Place back STR string declarations for lock/unlock strings used for KTR_LOCK tracing in order to avoid duplication. - Insert some tracepoints back into the mutex acq/rel code, thus ensuring that we can trace all lock acq/rel's again. - All CURPROC != NULL checks are MPASS()es (under MUTEX_DEBUG) because they signify a serious mutex corruption. - Change up some KASSERT()s to MPASS()es, and vice-versa, depending on the type of problem we're debugging (INVARIANTS is used here to check that the API is being used properly whereas MUTEX_DEBUG is used to ensure that something general isn't happening that will have bad impact on mutex locks). Reminded by: jhb, jake, asmodai
2001-02-11 02:54:16 +00:00
CTR1(KTR_LOCK, "_mtx_lock_sleep: %p recursing", m);
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
return;
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
}
Give mutex(9) the ability to recurse on a per-instance basis. Now the MTX_RECURSE flag can be passed to the mtx_*_flag() calls. This helps in cases we want to narrow down to specific calls the possibility to recurse for some locks. Sponsored by: EMC / Isilon storage division Reviewed by: jeff, alc Tested by: pho
2013-08-09 11:24:29 +00:00
opts &= ~MTX_RECURSE;
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
Add software PMC support. New kernel events can be added at various location for sampling or counting. This will for example allow easy system profiling whatever the processor is with known tools like pmcstat(8). Simultaneous usage of software PMC and hardware PMC is possible, for example looking at the lock acquire failure, page fault while sampling on instructions. Sponsored by: NETASQ MFC after: 1 month
2012-03-28 20:58:30 +00:00
#ifdef HWPMC_HOOKS
PMC_SOFT_CALL( , , lock, failed);
#endif
move lock_profile calls out of the macros and into kern_mutex.c add check for mtx_recurse == 0 when releasing sleep lock
2007-04-03 22:52:31 +00:00
lock_profile_obtain_lock_failed(&m->lock_object,
&contested, &waittime);
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
if (LOCK_LOG_TEST(&m->lock_object, opts))
- Axe RETIP() as it was very i386 specific and unwieldy. Instead, use the passed in filename and line number in the KTR tracepoint message. - Even though it is #if 0'd code, change the code to detect that a process is an interrupt thread to check p->p_ithd against NULL rather than checking non-existant process flags from BSD/OS. - Use '%p' to print pointers in KTR log messages instead of assuming sizeof(int) == sizeof(void *). - Don't set p_mtxname to NULL when releasing a mutex. It doesn't hurt to leave it set (we don't clear w_mesg for example) and at least at one time in the past, there used to be race conditions in the kernel that would result in setting this to NULL causing the kernel to dereference NULL. - Make the _mtx_assert() function be compiled in if INVARIANTS_SUPPORT is defined rather than if INVARIANTS is defined so that a KLD compiled with INVARIANTS that uses mtx_assert() can be used with a kernel that just has INVARIANT_SUPPORT compiled in.
2001-02-24 19:36:13 +00:00
CTR4(KTR_LOCK,
"_mtx_lock_sleep: %s contested (lock=%p) at %s:%d",
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
m->lock_object.lo_name, (void *)m->mtx_lock, file, line);
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
- Remove <machine/mutex.h>. Most of the headers were empty, and the contents of the ones that were not empty were stale and unused. - Now that <machine/mutex.h> no longer exists, there is no need to allow it to override various helper macros in <sys/mutex.h>. - Rename various helper macros for low-level operations on mutexes to live in the _mtx_* or __mtx_* namespaces. While here, change the names to more closely match the real API functions they are backing. - Drop support for including <sys/mutex.h> in assembly source files. Suggested by: bde (1, 2)
2010-11-09 20:46:41 +00:00
while (!_mtx_obtain_lock(m, tid)) {
Add the OpenSolaris dtrace lockstat provider. The lockstat provider adds probes for mutexes, reader/writer and shared/exclusive locks to gather contention statistics and other locking information for dtrace scripts, the lockstat(1M) command and other potential consumers. Reviewed by: attilio jhb jb Approved by: gnn (mentor)
2009-05-26 20:28:22 +00:00
#ifdef KDTRACE_HOOKS
spin_cnt++;
#endif
Simplify the adaptive spinning algorithm in rwlock and mutex: currently, before to spin the turnstile spinlock is acquired and the waiters flag is set. This is not strictly necessary, so just spin before to acquire the spinlock and to set the flags. This will simplify a lot other functions too, as now we have the waiters flag set only if there are actually waiters. This should make wakeup/sleeping couplet faster under intensive mutex workload. This also fixes a bug in rw_try_upgrade() in the adaptive case, where turnstile_lookup() will recurse on the ts_lock lock that will never be really released [1]. [1] Reported by: jeff with Nokia help Tested by: pho, kris (earlier, bugged version of rwlock part) Discussed with: jhb [2], jeff MFC after: 1 week [2] John had a similar patch about 6.x and/or 7.x about mutexes probabilly
2007-11-26 22:37:35 +00:00
#ifdef ADAPTIVE_MUTEXES
/*
* If the owner is running on another CPU, spin until the
* owner stops running or the state of the lock changes.
*/
v = m->mtx_lock;
if (v != MTX_UNOWNED) {
owner = (struct thread *)(v & ~MTX_FLAGMASK);
if (TD_IS_RUNNING(owner)) {
if (LOCK_LOG_TEST(&m->lock_object, 0))
CTR3(KTR_LOCK,
"%s: spinning on %p held by %p",
__func__, m, owner);
while (mtx_owner(m) == owner &&
Add the OpenSolaris dtrace lockstat provider. The lockstat provider adds probes for mutexes, reader/writer and shared/exclusive locks to gather contention statistics and other locking information for dtrace scripts, the lockstat(1M) command and other potential consumers. Reviewed by: attilio jhb jb Approved by: gnn (mentor)
2009-05-26 20:28:22 +00:00
TD_IS_RUNNING(owner)) {
Simplify the adaptive spinning algorithm in rwlock and mutex: currently, before to spin the turnstile spinlock is acquired and the waiters flag is set. This is not strictly necessary, so just spin before to acquire the spinlock and to set the flags. This will simplify a lot other functions too, as now we have the waiters flag set only if there are actually waiters. This should make wakeup/sleeping couplet faster under intensive mutex workload. This also fixes a bug in rw_try_upgrade() in the adaptive case, where turnstile_lookup() will recurse on the ts_lock lock that will never be really released [1]. [1] Reported by: jeff with Nokia help Tested by: pho, kris (earlier, bugged version of rwlock part) Discussed with: jhb [2], jeff MFC after: 1 week [2] John had a similar patch about 6.x and/or 7.x about mutexes probabilly
2007-11-26 22:37:35 +00:00
cpu_spinwait();
Add the OpenSolaris dtrace lockstat provider. The lockstat provider adds probes for mutexes, reader/writer and shared/exclusive locks to gather contention statistics and other locking information for dtrace scripts, the lockstat(1M) command and other potential consumers. Reviewed by: attilio jhb jb Approved by: gnn (mentor)
2009-05-26 20:28:22 +00:00
#ifdef KDTRACE_HOOKS
spin_cnt++;
#endif
}
Simplify the adaptive spinning algorithm in rwlock and mutex: currently, before to spin the turnstile spinlock is acquired and the waiters flag is set. This is not strictly necessary, so just spin before to acquire the spinlock and to set the flags. This will simplify a lot other functions too, as now we have the waiters flag set only if there are actually waiters. This should make wakeup/sleeping couplet faster under intensive mutex workload. This also fixes a bug in rw_try_upgrade() in the adaptive case, where turnstile_lookup() will recurse on the ts_lock lock that will never be really released [1]. [1] Reported by: jeff with Nokia help Tested by: pho, kris (earlier, bugged version of rwlock part) Discussed with: jhb [2], jeff MFC after: 1 week [2] John had a similar patch about 6.x and/or 7.x about mutexes probabilly
2007-11-26 22:37:35 +00:00
continue;
}
}
#endif
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
ts = turnstile_trywait(&m->lock_object);
Miscellaneous cleanups to _mtx_lock_sleep(): - Declare some local variables at the top of the function instead of in a nested block. - Use mtx_owned() instead of masking off bits from mtx_lock manually. - Read the value of mtx_lock into 'v' as a separate line rather than inside an if statement for clarity. This code is hairy enough as it is.
2003-03-04 20:32:41 +00:00
v = m->mtx_lock;
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
/*
* Check if the lock has been released while spinning for
Add an implementation of turnstiles and change the sleep mutex code to use turnstiles to implement blocking isntead of implementing a thread queue directly. These turnstiles are somewhat similar to those used in Solaris 7 as described in Solaris Internals but are also different. Turnstiles do not come out of a fixed-sized pool. Rather, each thread is assigned a turnstile when it is created that it frees when it is destroyed. When a thread blocks on a lock, it donates its turnstile to that lock to serve as queue of blocked threads. The queue associated with a given lock is found by a lookup in a simple hash table. The turnstile itself is protected by a lock associated with its entry in the hash table. This means that sched_lock is no longer needed to contest on a mutex. Instead, sched_lock is only used when manipulating run queues or thread priorities. Turnstiles also implement priority propagation inherently. Currently turnstiles only support mutexes. Eventually, however, turnstiles may grow two queue's to support a non-sleepable reader/writer lock implementation. For more details, see the comments in sys/turnstile.h and kern/subr_turnstile.c. The two primary advantages from the turnstile code include: 1) the size of struct mutex shrinks by four pointers as it no longer stores the thread queue linkages directly, and 2) less contention on sched_lock in SMP systems including the ability for multiple CPUs to contend on different locks simultaneously (not that this last detail is necessarily that much of a big win). Note that 1) means that this commit is a kernel ABI breaker, so don't mix old modules with a new kernel and vice versa. Tested on: i386 SMP, sparc64 SMP, alpha SMP
2003-11-11 22:07:29 +00:00
* the turnstile chain lock.
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
*/
Miscellaneous cleanups to _mtx_lock_sleep(): - Declare some local variables at the top of the function instead of in a nested block. - Use mtx_owned() instead of masking off bits from mtx_lock manually. - Read the value of mtx_lock into 'v' as a separate line rather than inside an if statement for clarity. This code is hairy enough as it is.
2003-03-04 20:32:41 +00:00
if (v == MTX_UNOWNED) {
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
turnstile_cancel(ts);
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
continue;
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
}
Fix up priority propagation: - Use a better test for determining when a process is running. - Convert some checks to assertions. - Remove unnecessary tests. - Save the priority before acquiring a mutex rather than in msleep(9).
2000-11-30 00:51:16 +00:00
Simplify the adaptive spinning algorithm in rwlock and mutex: currently, before to spin the turnstile spinlock is acquired and the waiters flag is set. This is not strictly necessary, so just spin before to acquire the spinlock and to set the flags. This will simplify a lot other functions too, as now we have the waiters flag set only if there are actually waiters. This should make wakeup/sleeping couplet faster under intensive mutex workload. This also fixes a bug in rw_try_upgrade() in the adaptive case, where turnstile_lookup() will recurse on the ts_lock lock that will never be really released [1]. [1] Reported by: jeff with Nokia help Tested by: pho, kris (earlier, bugged version of rwlock part) Discussed with: jhb [2], jeff MFC after: 1 week [2] John had a similar patch about 6.x and/or 7.x about mutexes probabilly
2007-11-26 22:37:35 +00:00
#ifdef ADAPTIVE_MUTEXES
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
/*
Tweak a few comments on adaptive spinning.
2009-05-29 13:56:34 +00:00
* The current lock owner might have started executing
* on another CPU (or the lock could have changed
* owners) while we were waiting on the turnstile
* chain lock. If so, drop the turnstile lock and try
* again.
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
*/
Simplify the adaptive spinning algorithm in rwlock and mutex: currently, before to spin the turnstile spinlock is acquired and the waiters flag is set. This is not strictly necessary, so just spin before to acquire the spinlock and to set the flags. This will simplify a lot other functions too, as now we have the waiters flag set only if there are actually waiters. This should make wakeup/sleeping couplet faster under intensive mutex workload. This also fixes a bug in rw_try_upgrade() in the adaptive case, where turnstile_lookup() will recurse on the ts_lock lock that will never be really released [1]. [1] Reported by: jeff with Nokia help Tested by: pho, kris (earlier, bugged version of rwlock part) Discussed with: jhb [2], jeff MFC after: 1 week [2] John had a similar patch about 6.x and/or 7.x about mutexes probabilly
2007-11-26 22:37:35 +00:00
owner = (struct thread *)(v & ~MTX_FLAGMASK);
if (TD_IS_RUNNING(owner)) {
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
turnstile_cancel(ts);
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
continue;
}
Simplify the adaptive spinning algorithm in rwlock and mutex: currently, before to spin the turnstile spinlock is acquired and the waiters flag is set. This is not strictly necessary, so just spin before to acquire the spinlock and to set the flags. This will simplify a lot other functions too, as now we have the waiters flag set only if there are actually waiters. This should make wakeup/sleeping couplet faster under intensive mutex workload. This also fixes a bug in rw_try_upgrade() in the adaptive case, where turnstile_lookup() will recurse on the ts_lock lock that will never be really released [1]. [1] Reported by: jeff with Nokia help Tested by: pho, kris (earlier, bugged version of rwlock part) Discussed with: jhb [2], jeff MFC after: 1 week [2] John had a similar patch about 6.x and/or 7.x about mutexes probabilly
2007-11-26 22:37:35 +00:00
#endif
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
Add code to make default mutexes adaptive if the ADAPTIVE_MUTEXES kernel option is used (not on by default). - In the case of trying to lock a mutex, if the MTX_CONTESTED flag is set, then we can safely read the thread pointer from the mtx_lock member while holding sched_lock. We then examine the thread to see if it is currently executing on another CPU. If it is, then we keep looping instead of blocking. - In the case of trying to unlock a mutex, it is now possible for a mutex to have MTX_CONTESTED set in mtx_lock but to not have any threads actually blocked on it, so we need to handle that case. In that case, we just release the lock as if MTX_CONTESTED was not set and return. - We do not adaptively spin on Giant as Giant is held for long times and it slows SMP systems down to a crawl (it was taking several minutes, like 5-10 or so for my test alpha and sparc64 SMP boxes to boot up when they adaptively spinned on Giant). - We only compile in the code to do this for SMP kernels, it doesn't make sense for UP kernels. Tested on: i386, alpha, sparc64
2002-05-21 20:47:11 +00:00
/*
Simplify the adaptive spinning algorithm in rwlock and mutex: currently, before to spin the turnstile spinlock is acquired and the waiters flag is set. This is not strictly necessary, so just spin before to acquire the spinlock and to set the flags. This will simplify a lot other functions too, as now we have the waiters flag set only if there are actually waiters. This should make wakeup/sleeping couplet faster under intensive mutex workload. This also fixes a bug in rw_try_upgrade() in the adaptive case, where turnstile_lookup() will recurse on the ts_lock lock that will never be really released [1]. [1] Reported by: jeff with Nokia help Tested by: pho, kris (earlier, bugged version of rwlock part) Discussed with: jhb [2], jeff MFC after: 1 week [2] John had a similar patch about 6.x and/or 7.x about mutexes probabilly
2007-11-26 22:37:35 +00:00
* If the mutex isn't already contested and a failure occurs
* setting the contested bit, the mutex was either released
* or the state of the MTX_RECURSED bit changed.
Add code to make default mutexes adaptive if the ADAPTIVE_MUTEXES kernel option is used (not on by default). - In the case of trying to lock a mutex, if the MTX_CONTESTED flag is set, then we can safely read the thread pointer from the mtx_lock member while holding sched_lock. We then examine the thread to see if it is currently executing on another CPU. If it is, then we keep looping instead of blocking. - In the case of trying to unlock a mutex, it is now possible for a mutex to have MTX_CONTESTED set in mtx_lock but to not have any threads actually blocked on it, so we need to handle that case. In that case, we just release the lock as if MTX_CONTESTED was not set and return. - We do not adaptively spin on Giant as Giant is held for long times and it slows SMP systems down to a crawl (it was taking several minutes, like 5-10 or so for my test alpha and sparc64 SMP boxes to boot up when they adaptively spinned on Giant). - We only compile in the code to do this for SMP kernels, it doesn't make sense for UP kernels. Tested on: i386, alpha, sparc64
2002-05-21 20:47:11 +00:00
*/
Simplify the adaptive spinning algorithm in rwlock and mutex: currently, before to spin the turnstile spinlock is acquired and the waiters flag is set. This is not strictly necessary, so just spin before to acquire the spinlock and to set the flags. This will simplify a lot other functions too, as now we have the waiters flag set only if there are actually waiters. This should make wakeup/sleeping couplet faster under intensive mutex workload. This also fixes a bug in rw_try_upgrade() in the adaptive case, where turnstile_lookup() will recurse on the ts_lock lock that will never be really released [1]. [1] Reported by: jeff with Nokia help Tested by: pho, kris (earlier, bugged version of rwlock part) Discussed with: jhb [2], jeff MFC after: 1 week [2] John had a similar patch about 6.x and/or 7.x about mutexes probabilly
2007-11-26 22:37:35 +00:00
if ((v & MTX_CONTESTED) == 0 &&
!atomic_cmpset_ptr(&m->mtx_lock, v, v | MTX_CONTESTED)) {
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
turnstile_cancel(ts);
Add code to make default mutexes adaptive if the ADAPTIVE_MUTEXES kernel option is used (not on by default). - In the case of trying to lock a mutex, if the MTX_CONTESTED flag is set, then we can safely read the thread pointer from the mtx_lock member while holding sched_lock. We then examine the thread to see if it is currently executing on another CPU. If it is, then we keep looping instead of blocking. - In the case of trying to unlock a mutex, it is now possible for a mutex to have MTX_CONTESTED set in mtx_lock but to not have any threads actually blocked on it, so we need to handle that case. In that case, we just release the lock as if MTX_CONTESTED was not set and return. - We do not adaptively spin on Giant as Giant is held for long times and it slows SMP systems down to a crawl (it was taking several minutes, like 5-10 or so for my test alpha and sparc64 SMP boxes to boot up when they adaptively spinned on Giant). - We only compile in the code to do this for SMP kernels, it doesn't make sense for UP kernels. Tested on: i386, alpha, sparc64
2002-05-21 20:47:11 +00:00
continue;
}
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
/*
Spelling police.
2002-04-02 20:44:30 +00:00
* We definitely must sleep for this lock.
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
*/
mtx_assert(m, MA_NOTOWNED);
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
Add a new KTR type KTR_CONTENTION, and use it in the mutex code to log the start and end of periods during which mtx_lock() is waiting to acquire a sleep mutex. The log message includes the file and line of both the waiter and the holder. Reviewed by: jhb, jake
2002-08-26 18:39:38 +00:00
#ifdef KTR
if (!cont_logged) {
CTR6(KTR_CONTENTION,
"contention: %p at %s:%d wants %s, taken by %s:%d",
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
(void *)tid, file, line, m->lock_object.lo_name,
WITNESS_FILE(&m->lock_object),
WITNESS_LINE(&m->lock_object));
Add a new KTR type KTR_CONTENTION, and use it in the mutex code to log the start and end of periods during which mtx_lock() is waiting to acquire a sleep mutex. The log message includes the file and line of both the waiter and the holder. Reviewed by: jhb, jake
2002-08-26 18:39:38 +00:00
cont_logged = 1;
}
#endif
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
/*
Add an implementation of turnstiles and change the sleep mutex code to use turnstiles to implement blocking isntead of implementing a thread queue directly. These turnstiles are somewhat similar to those used in Solaris 7 as described in Solaris Internals but are also different. Turnstiles do not come out of a fixed-sized pool. Rather, each thread is assigned a turnstile when it is created that it frees when it is destroyed. When a thread blocks on a lock, it donates its turnstile to that lock to serve as queue of blocked threads. The queue associated with a given lock is found by a lookup in a simple hash table. The turnstile itself is protected by a lock associated with its entry in the hash table. This means that sched_lock is no longer needed to contest on a mutex. Instead, sched_lock is only used when manipulating run queues or thread priorities. Turnstiles also implement priority propagation inherently. Currently turnstiles only support mutexes. Eventually, however, turnstiles may grow two queue's to support a non-sleepable reader/writer lock implementation. For more details, see the comments in sys/turnstile.h and kern/subr_turnstile.c. The two primary advantages from the turnstile code include: 1) the size of struct mutex shrinks by four pointers as it no longer stores the thread queue linkages directly, and 2) less contention on sched_lock in SMP systems including the ability for multiple CPUs to contend on different locks simultaneously (not that this last detail is necessarily that much of a big win). Note that 1) means that this commit is a kernel ABI breaker, so don't mix old modules with a new kernel and vice versa. Tested on: i386 SMP, sparc64 SMP, alpha SMP
2003-11-11 22:07:29 +00:00
* Block on the turnstile.
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
*/
Add the OpenSolaris dtrace lockstat provider. The lockstat provider adds probes for mutexes, reader/writer and shared/exclusive locks to gather contention statistics and other locking information for dtrace scripts, the lockstat(1M) command and other potential consumers. Reviewed by: attilio jhb jb Approved by: gnn (mentor)
2009-05-26 20:28:22 +00:00
#ifdef KDTRACE_HOOKS
sleep_time -= lockstat_nsecs();
#endif
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
turnstile_wait(ts, mtx_owner(m), TS_EXCLUSIVE_QUEUE);
Add the OpenSolaris dtrace lockstat provider. The lockstat provider adds probes for mutexes, reader/writer and shared/exclusive locks to gather contention statistics and other locking information for dtrace scripts, the lockstat(1M) command and other potential consumers. Reviewed by: attilio jhb jb Approved by: gnn (mentor)
2009-05-26 20:28:22 +00:00
#ifdef KDTRACE_HOOKS
sleep_time += lockstat_nsecs();
sleep_cnt++;
#endif
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
}
Add a new KTR type KTR_CONTENTION, and use it in the mutex code to log the start and end of periods during which mtx_lock() is waiting to acquire a sleep mutex. The log message includes the file and line of both the waiter and the holder. Reviewed by: jhb, jake
2002-08-26 18:39:38 +00:00
#ifdef KTR
if (cont_logged) {
CTR4(KTR_CONTENTION,
"contention end: %s acquired by %p at %s:%d",
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
m->lock_object.lo_name, (void *)tid, file, line);
Add a new KTR type KTR_CONTENTION, and use it in the mutex code to log the start and end of periods during which mtx_lock() is waiting to acquire a sleep mutex. The log message includes the file and line of both the waiter and the holder. Reviewed by: jhb, jake
2002-08-26 18:39:38 +00:00
}
#endif
Add the OpenSolaris dtrace lockstat provider. The lockstat provider adds probes for mutexes, reader/writer and shared/exclusive locks to gather contention statistics and other locking information for dtrace scripts, the lockstat(1M) command and other potential consumers. Reviewed by: attilio jhb jb Approved by: gnn (mentor)
2009-05-26 20:28:22 +00:00
LOCKSTAT_PROFILE_OBTAIN_LOCK_SUCCESS(LS_MTX_LOCK_ACQUIRE, m, contested,
Various whitespace fixes.
2008-09-10 17:59:21 +00:00
waittime, file, line);
Add the OpenSolaris dtrace lockstat provider. The lockstat provider adds probes for mutexes, reader/writer and shared/exclusive locks to gather contention statistics and other locking information for dtrace scripts, the lockstat(1M) command and other potential consumers. Reviewed by: attilio jhb jb Approved by: gnn (mentor)
2009-05-26 20:28:22 +00:00
#ifdef KDTRACE_HOOKS
if (sleep_time)
LOCKSTAT_RECORD1(LS_MTX_LOCK_BLOCK, m, sleep_time);
/*
* Only record the loops spinning and not sleeping.
*/
if (spin_cnt > sleep_cnt)
LOCKSTAT_RECORD1(LS_MTX_LOCK_SPIN, m, (spin_cnt - sleep_cnt));
#endif
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
}
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
static void
_mtx_lock_spin_failed(struct mtx *m)
{
struct thread *td;
td = mtx_owner(m);
/* If the mutex is unlocked, try again. */
if (td == NULL)
return;
Restore non-SMP build. Reviewed by: attilio
2007-06-05 14:20:13 +00:00
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
printf( "spin lock %p (%s) held by %p (tid %d) too long\n",
m, m->lock_object.lo_name, td, td->td_tid);
#ifdef WITNESS
Right now, WITNESS just blindly pipes all the output to the (TOCONS | TOLOG) mask even when called from DDB points. That breaks several output, where the most notable is textdump output. Fix this by having configurable callbacks passed to witness_list_locks() and witness_display_spinlock() for printing out datas. Reported by: several broken textdump outputs Tested by: Giovanni Trematerra <giovanni dot trematerra at gmail dot com> MFC after: 7 days X-MFC: r207922
2010-05-11 18:24:22 +00:00
witness_display_spinlock(&m->lock_object, td, printf);
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
#endif
panic("spin lock held too long");
}
Restore non-SMP build. Reviewed by: attilio
2007-06-05 14:20:13 +00:00
#ifdef SMP
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
/*
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
* _mtx_lock_spin_cookie: the tougher part of acquiring an MTX_SPIN lock.
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
*
* This is only called if we need to actually spin for the lock. Recursion
* is handled inline.
*/
void
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
_mtx_lock_spin_cookie(volatile uintptr_t *c, uintptr_t tid, int opts,
const char *file, int line)
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
{
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
struct mtx *m;
- Wrap lock profiling state variables in #ifdef LOCK_PROFILING blocks.
2009-03-15 08:03:54 +00:00
int i = 0;
#ifdef LOCK_PROFILING
int contested = 0;
move lock_profile calls out of the macros and into kern_mutex.c add check for mtx_recurse == 0 when releasing sleep lock
2007-04-03 22:52:31 +00:00
uint64_t waittime = 0;
- Wrap lock profiling state variables in #ifdef LOCK_PROFILING blocks.
2009-03-15 08:03:54 +00:00
#endif
Various whitespace fixes.
2008-09-10 17:59:21 +00:00
panic: add a switch and infrastructure for stopping other CPUs in SMP case Historical behavior of letting other CPUs merily go on is a default for time being. The new behavior can be switched on via kern.stop_scheduler_on_panic tunable and sysctl. Stopping of the CPUs has (at least) the following benefits: - more of the system state at panic time is preserved intact - threads and interrupts do not interfere with dumping of the system state Only one thread runs uninterrupted after panic if stop_scheduler_on_panic is set. That thread might call code that is also used in normal context and that code might use locks to prevent concurrent execution of certain parts. Those locks might be held by the stopped threads and would never be released. To work around this issue, it was decided that instead of explicit checks for panic context, we would rather put those checks inside the locking primitives. This change has substantial portions written and re-written by attilio and kib at various times. Other changes are heavily based on the ideas and patches submitted by jhb and mdf. bde has provided many insights into the details and history of the current code. The new behavior may cause problems for systems that use a USB keyboard for interfacing with system console. This is because of some unusual locking patterns in the ukbd code which have to be used because on one hand ukbd is below syscons, but on the other hand it has to interface with other usb code that uses regular mutexes/Giant for its concurrency protection. Dumping to USB-connected disks may also be affected. PR: amd64/139614 (at least) In cooperation with: attilio, jhb, kib, mdf Discussed with: arch@, bde Tested by: Eugene Grosbein <eugen@grosbein.net>, gnn, Steven Hartland <killing@multiplay.co.uk>, glebius, Andrew Boyer <aboyer@averesystems.com> (various versions of the patch) MFC after: 3 months (or never)
2011-12-11 21:02:01 +00:00
if (SCHEDULER_STOPPED())
return;
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
m = mtxlock2mtx(c);
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
if (LOCK_LOG_TEST(&m->lock_object, opts))
- Place back STR string declarations for lock/unlock strings used for KTR_LOCK tracing in order to avoid duplication. - Insert some tracepoints back into the mutex acq/rel code, thus ensuring that we can trace all lock acq/rel's again. - All CURPROC != NULL checks are MPASS()es (under MUTEX_DEBUG) because they signify a serious mutex corruption. - Change up some KASSERT()s to MPASS()es, and vice-versa, depending on the type of problem we're debugging (INVARIANTS is used here to check that the API is being used properly whereas MUTEX_DEBUG is used to ensure that something general isn't happening that will have bad impact on mutex locks). Reminded by: jhb, jake, asmodai
2001-02-11 02:54:16 +00:00
CTR1(KTR_LOCK, "_mtx_lock_spin: %p spinning", m);
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
Add software PMC support. New kernel events can be added at various location for sampling or counting. This will for example allow easy system profiling whatever the processor is with known tools like pmcstat(8). Simultaneous usage of software PMC and hardware PMC is possible, for example looking at the lock acquire failure, page fault while sampling on instructions. Sponsored by: NETASQ MFC after: 1 month
2012-03-28 20:58:30 +00:00
#ifdef HWPMC_HOOKS
PMC_SOFT_CALL( , , lock, failed);
#endif
move lock_profile calls out of the macros and into kern_mutex.c add check for mtx_recurse == 0 when releasing sleep lock
2007-04-03 22:52:31 +00:00
lock_profile_obtain_lock_failed(&m->lock_object, &contested, &waittime);
- Remove <machine/mutex.h>. Most of the headers were empty, and the contents of the ones that were not empty were stale and unused. - Now that <machine/mutex.h> no longer exists, there is no need to allow it to override various helper macros in <sys/mutex.h>. - Rename various helper macros for low-level operations on mutexes to live in the _mtx_* or __mtx_* namespaces. While here, change the names to more closely match the real API functions they are backing. - Drop support for including <sys/mutex.h> in assembly source files. Suggested by: bde (1, 2)
2010-11-09 20:46:41 +00:00
while (!_mtx_obtain_lock(m, tid)) {
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
Exit and re-enter the critical section while spinning for a spinlock so that interrupts can come in while we are waiting for a lock.
2001-04-17 03:34:52 +00:00
/* Give interrupts a chance while we spin. */
Divorce critical sections from spinlocks. Critical sections as denoted by critical_enter() and critical_exit() are now solely a mechanism for deferring kernel preemptions. They no longer have any affect on interrupts. This means that standalone critical sections are now very cheap as they are simply unlocked integer increments and decrements for the common case. Spin mutexes now use a separate KPI implemented in MD code: spinlock_enter() and spinlock_exit(). This KPI is responsible for providing whatever MD guarantees are needed to ensure that a thread holding a spin lock won't be preempted by any other code that will try to lock the same lock. For now all archs continue to block interrupts in a "spinlock section" as they did formerly in all critical sections. Note that I've also taken this opportunity to push a few things into MD code rather than MI. For example, critical_fork_exit() no longer exists. Instead, MD code ensures that new threads have the correct state when they are created. Also, we no longer try to fixup the idlethreads for APs in MI code. Instead, each arch sets the initial curthread and adjusts the state of the idle thread it borrows in order to perform the initial context switch. This change is largely a big NOP, but the cleaner separation it provides will allow for more efficient alternative locking schemes in other parts of the kernel (bare critical sections rather than per-CPU spin mutexes for per-CPU data for example). Reviewed by: grehan, cognet, arch@, others Tested on: i386, alpha, sparc64, powerpc, arm, possibly more
2005-04-04 21:53:56 +00:00
spinlock_exit();
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
while (m->mtx_lock != MTX_UNOWNED) {
Add appropriate IA32 "pause" instructions to improve performanec on Pentium 4's and newer IA32 processors. The "pause" instruction has been verified by Intel to be a NOP on all currently existing IA32 processors prior to the Pentium 4.
2002-05-21 22:26:35 +00:00
if (i++ < 10000000) {
Instead of calling ia32_pause() conditionally on __i386__ or __amd64__ being defined, define and use a new MD macro, cpu_spinwait(). It only expands to something on i386 and amd64, so the compiled code should be identical. Name of the macro found by: jhb Reviewed by: jhb
2004-08-03 18:44:27 +00:00
cpu_spinwait();
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
continue;
Add appropriate IA32 "pause" instructions to improve performanec on Pentium 4's and newer IA32 processors. The "pause" instruction has been verified by Intel to be a NOP on all currently existing IA32 processors prior to the Pentium 4.
2002-05-21 22:26:35 +00:00
}
- When spinning on a spin lock, if the debugger is active or we are in a panic, go ahead and do the longer DELAY(1) spin wait. - If we panic due to spinning too long, print out a few more details including the pointer to the mutex in question and the tid of the owning thread.
2006-08-15 18:26:12 +00:00
if (i < 60000000 || kdb_active || panicstr != NULL)
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
DELAY(1);
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
else
_mtx_lock_spin_failed(m);
Instead of calling ia32_pause() conditionally on __i386__ or __amd64__ being defined, define and use a new MD macro, cpu_spinwait(). It only expands to something on i386 and amd64, so the compiled code should be identical. Name of the macro found by: jhb Reviewed by: jhb
2004-08-03 18:44:27 +00:00
cpu_spinwait();
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
}
Divorce critical sections from spinlocks. Critical sections as denoted by critical_enter() and critical_exit() are now solely a mechanism for deferring kernel preemptions. They no longer have any affect on interrupts. This means that standalone critical sections are now very cheap as they are simply unlocked integer increments and decrements for the common case. Spin mutexes now use a separate KPI implemented in MD code: spinlock_enter() and spinlock_exit(). This KPI is responsible for providing whatever MD guarantees are needed to ensure that a thread holding a spin lock won't be preempted by any other code that will try to lock the same lock. For now all archs continue to block interrupts in a "spinlock section" as they did formerly in all critical sections. Note that I've also taken this opportunity to push a few things into MD code rather than MI. For example, critical_fork_exit() no longer exists. Instead, MD code ensures that new threads have the correct state when they are created. Also, we no longer try to fixup the idlethreads for APs in MI code. Instead, each arch sets the initial curthread and adjusts the state of the idle thread it borrows in order to perform the initial context switch. This change is largely a big NOP, but the cleaner separation it provides will allow for more efficient alternative locking schemes in other parts of the kernel (bare critical sections rather than per-CPU spin mutexes for per-CPU data for example). Reviewed by: grehan, cognet, arch@, others Tested on: i386, alpha, sparc64, powerpc, arm, possibly more
2005-04-04 21:53:56 +00:00
spinlock_enter();
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
}
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
if (LOCK_LOG_TEST(&m->lock_object, opts))
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
CTR1(KTR_LOCK, "_mtx_lock_spin: %p spin done", m);
Add the OpenSolaris dtrace lockstat provider. The lockstat provider adds probes for mutexes, reader/writer and shared/exclusive locks to gather contention statistics and other locking information for dtrace scripts, the lockstat(1M) command and other potential consumers. Reviewed by: attilio jhb jb Approved by: gnn (mentor)
2009-05-26 20:28:22 +00:00
LOCKSTAT_PROFILE_OBTAIN_LOCK_SUCCESS(LS_MTX_SPIN_LOCK_ACQUIRE, m,
contested, waittime, (file), (line));
LOCKSTAT_RECORD1(LS_MTX_SPIN_LOCK_SPIN, m, i);
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
}
Rework the optimization for spinlocks on UP to be slightly less drastic and turn it back on. Specifically, the actual changes are now less intrusive in that the _get_spin_lock() and _rel_spin_lock() macros now have their contents changed for UP vs SMP kernels which centralizes the changes. Also, UP kernels do not use _mtx_lock_spin() and no longer include it. The UP versions of the spin lock functions do not use any atomic operations, but simple compares and stores which allow mtx_owned() to still work for spin locks while removing the overhead of atomic operations. Tested on: i386, alpha
2005-01-05 21:13:27 +00:00
#endif /* SMP */
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
void
Introduce macro stubs in the mutex implementation that will be always defined and will allow consumers, willing to provide options, file and line to locking requests, to not worry about options redefining the interfaces. This is typically useful when there is the need to build another locking interface on top of the mutex one. The introduced functions that consumers can use are: - mtx_lock_flags_ - mtx_unlock_flags_ - mtx_lock_spin_flags_ - mtx_unlock_spin_flags_ - mtx_assert_ - thread_lock_flags_ Spare notes: - Likely we can get rid of all the 'INVARIANTS' specification in the ppbus code by using the same macro as done in this patch (but this is left to the ppbus maintainer) - all the other locking interfaces may require a similar cleanup, where the most notable case is sx which will allow a further cleanup of vm_map locking facilities - The patch should be fully compatible with older branches, thus a MFC is previewed (infact it uses all the underlying mechanisms already present). Comments review by: eadler, Ben Kaduk Discussed with: kib, jhb MFC after: 1 month
2011-11-20 16:33:09 +00:00
thread_lock_flags_(struct thread *td, int opts, const char *file, int line)
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
{
struct mtx *m;
uintptr_t tid;
- Wrap lock profiling state variables in #ifdef LOCK_PROFILING blocks.
2009-03-15 08:03:54 +00:00
int i;
#ifdef LOCK_PROFILING
int contested = 0;
uint64_t waittime = 0;
#endif
Add the OpenSolaris dtrace lockstat provider. The lockstat provider adds probes for mutexes, reader/writer and shared/exclusive locks to gather contention statistics and other locking information for dtrace scripts, the lockstat(1M) command and other potential consumers. Reviewed by: attilio jhb jb Approved by: gnn (mentor)
2009-05-26 20:28:22 +00:00
#ifdef KDTRACE_HOOKS
uint64_t spin_cnt = 0;
#endif
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
- Wrap lock profiling state variables in #ifdef LOCK_PROFILING blocks.
2009-03-15 08:03:54 +00:00
i = 0;
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
tid = (uintptr_t)curthread;
panic: add a switch and infrastructure for stopping other CPUs in SMP case Historical behavior of letting other CPUs merily go on is a default for time being. The new behavior can be switched on via kern.stop_scheduler_on_panic tunable and sysctl. Stopping of the CPUs has (at least) the following benefits: - more of the system state at panic time is preserved intact - threads and interrupts do not interfere with dumping of the system state Only one thread runs uninterrupted after panic if stop_scheduler_on_panic is set. That thread might call code that is also used in normal context and that code might use locks to prevent concurrent execution of certain parts. Those locks might be held by the stopped threads and would never be released. To work around this issue, it was decided that instead of explicit checks for panic context, we would rather put those checks inside the locking primitives. This change has substantial portions written and re-written by attilio and kib at various times. Other changes are heavily based on the ideas and patches submitted by jhb and mdf. bde has provided many insights into the details and history of the current code. The new behavior may cause problems for systems that use a USB keyboard for interfacing with system console. This is because of some unusual locking patterns in the ukbd code which have to be used because on one hand ukbd is below syscons, but on the other hand it has to interface with other usb code that uses regular mutexes/Giant for its concurrency protection. Dumping to USB-connected disks may also be affected. PR: amd64/139614 (at least) In cooperation with: attilio, jhb, kib, mdf Discussed with: arch@, bde Tested by: Eugene Grosbein <eugen@grosbein.net>, gnn, Steven Hartland <killing@multiplay.co.uk>, glebius, Andrew Boyer <aboyer@averesystems.com> (various versions of the patch) MFC after: 3 months (or never)
2011-12-11 21:02:01 +00:00
if (SCHEDULER_STOPPED())
return;
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
for (;;) {
retry:
spinlock_enter();
- Placing the 'volatile' on the right side of the * in the td_lock declaration removes the need for __DEVOLATILE(). Pointed out by: tegge
2007-06-06 03:40:47 +00:00
m = td->td_lock;
Add a couple of assertions and KTR logging to thread_lock_flags() to match mtx_lock_spin_flags(). MFC after: 1 week
2008-02-13 23:33:50 +00:00
KASSERT(m->mtx_lock != MTX_DESTROYED,
("thread_lock() of destroyed mutex @ %s:%d", file, line));
KASSERT(LOCK_CLASS(&m->lock_object) == &lock_class_mtx_spin,
("thread_lock() of sleep mutex %s @ %s:%d",
m->lock_object.lo_name, file, line));
Add KASSERT()'s to catch attempts to recurse on spin mutexes that aren't marked recursable either via mtx_lock_spin() or thread_lock(). MFC after: 1 week
2008-02-13 23:39:05 +00:00
if (mtx_owned(m))
KASSERT((m->lock_object.lo_flags & LO_RECURSABLE) != 0,
("thread_lock: recursed on non-recursive mutex %s @ %s:%d\n",
m->lock_object.lo_name, file, line));
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
WITNESS_CHECKORDER(&m->lock_object,
Teach WITNESS about the interlocks used with lockmgr. This removes a bunch of spurious witness warnings since lockmgr grew witness support. Before this, every time you passed an interlock to a lockmgr lock WITNESS treated it as a LOR. Reviewed by: attilio
2008-09-10 19:13:30 +00:00
opts | LOP_NEWORDER | LOP_EXCLUSIVE, file, line, NULL);
- Remove <machine/mutex.h>. Most of the headers were empty, and the contents of the ones that were not empty were stale and unused. - Now that <machine/mutex.h> no longer exists, there is no need to allow it to override various helper macros in <sys/mutex.h>. - Rename various helper macros for low-level operations on mutexes to live in the _mtx_* or __mtx_* namespaces. While here, change the names to more closely match the real API functions they are backing. - Drop support for including <sys/mutex.h> in assembly source files. Suggested by: bde (1, 2)
2010-11-09 20:46:41 +00:00
while (!_mtx_obtain_lock(m, tid)) {
Add the OpenSolaris dtrace lockstat provider. The lockstat provider adds probes for mutexes, reader/writer and shared/exclusive locks to gather contention statistics and other locking information for dtrace scripts, the lockstat(1M) command and other potential consumers. Reviewed by: attilio jhb jb Approved by: gnn (mentor)
2009-05-26 20:28:22 +00:00
#ifdef KDTRACE_HOOKS
spin_cnt++;
#endif
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
if (m->mtx_lock == tid) {
m->mtx_recurse++;
break;
}
Add software PMC support. New kernel events can be added at various location for sampling or counting. This will for example allow easy system profiling whatever the processor is with known tools like pmcstat(8). Simultaneous usage of software PMC and hardware PMC is possible, for example looking at the lock acquire failure, page fault while sampling on instructions. Sponsored by: NETASQ MFC after: 1 month
2012-03-28 20:58:30 +00:00
#ifdef HWPMC_HOOKS
PMC_SOFT_CALL( , , lock, failed);
#endif
- Re-implement lock profiling in such a way that it no longer breaks the ABI when enabled. There is no longer an embedded lock_profile_object in each lock. Instead a list of lock_profile_objects is kept per-thread for each lock it may own. The cnt_hold statistic is now always 0 to facilitate this. - Support shared locking by tracking individual lock instances and statistics in the per-thread per-instance lock_profile_object. - Make the lock profiling hash table a per-cpu singly linked list with a per-cpu static lock_prof allocator. This removes the need for an array of spinlocks and reduces cache contention between cores. - Use a seperate hash for spinlocks and other locks so that only a critical_enter() is required and not a spinlock_enter() to modify the per-cpu tables. - Count time spent spinning in the lock statistics. - Remove the LOCK_PROFILE_SHARED option as it is always supported now. - Specifically drop and release the scheduler locks in both schedulers since we track owners now. In collaboration with: Kip Macy Sponsored by: Nokia
2007-12-15 23:13:31 +00:00
lock_profile_obtain_lock_failed(&m->lock_object,
&contested, &waittime);
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
/* Give interrupts a chance while we spin. */
spinlock_exit();
while (m->mtx_lock != MTX_UNOWNED) {
if (i++ < 10000000)
cpu_spinwait();
else if (i < 60000000 ||
kdb_active || panicstr != NULL)
DELAY(1);
else
_mtx_lock_spin_failed(m);
cpu_spinwait();
if (m != td->td_lock)
goto retry;
}
spinlock_enter();
}
if (m == td->td_lock)
break;
- Remove <machine/mutex.h>. Most of the headers were empty, and the contents of the ones that were not empty were stale and unused. - Now that <machine/mutex.h> no longer exists, there is no need to allow it to override various helper macros in <sys/mutex.h>. - Rename various helper macros for low-level operations on mutexes to live in the _mtx_* or __mtx_* namespaces. While here, change the names to more closely match the real API functions they are backing. - Drop support for including <sys/mutex.h> in assembly source files. Suggested by: bde (1, 2)
2010-11-09 20:46:41 +00:00
__mtx_unlock_spin(m); /* does spinlock_exit() */
Add the OpenSolaris dtrace lockstat provider. The lockstat provider adds probes for mutexes, reader/writer and shared/exclusive locks to gather contention statistics and other locking information for dtrace scripts, the lockstat(1M) command and other potential consumers. Reviewed by: attilio jhb jb Approved by: gnn (mentor)
2009-05-26 20:28:22 +00:00
#ifdef KDTRACE_HOOKS
spin_cnt++;
#endif
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
}
- Re-implement lock profiling in such a way that it no longer breaks the ABI when enabled. There is no longer an embedded lock_profile_object in each lock. Instead a list of lock_profile_objects is kept per-thread for each lock it may own. The cnt_hold statistic is now always 0 to facilitate this. - Support shared locking by tracking individual lock instances and statistics in the per-thread per-instance lock_profile_object. - Make the lock profiling hash table a per-cpu singly linked list with a per-cpu static lock_prof allocator. This removes the need for an array of spinlocks and reduces cache contention between cores. - Use a seperate hash for spinlocks and other locks so that only a critical_enter() is required and not a spinlock_enter() to modify the per-cpu tables. - Count time spent spinning in the lock statistics. - Remove the LOCK_PROFILE_SHARED option as it is always supported now. - Specifically drop and release the scheduler locks in both schedulers since we track owners now. In collaboration with: Kip Macy Sponsored by: Nokia
2007-12-15 23:13:31 +00:00
if (m->mtx_recurse == 0)
Add the OpenSolaris dtrace lockstat provider. The lockstat provider adds probes for mutexes, reader/writer and shared/exclusive locks to gather contention statistics and other locking information for dtrace scripts, the lockstat(1M) command and other potential consumers. Reviewed by: attilio jhb jb Approved by: gnn (mentor)
2009-05-26 20:28:22 +00:00
LOCKSTAT_PROFILE_OBTAIN_LOCK_SUCCESS(LS_MTX_SPIN_LOCK_ACQUIRE,
m, contested, waittime, (file), (line));
Add a couple of assertions and KTR logging to thread_lock_flags() to match mtx_lock_spin_flags(). MFC after: 1 week
2008-02-13 23:33:50 +00:00
LOCK_LOG_LOCK("LOCK", &m->lock_object, opts, m->mtx_recurse, file,
line);
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
WITNESS_LOCK(&m->lock_object, opts | LOP_EXCLUSIVE, file, line);
Add the OpenSolaris dtrace lockstat provider. The lockstat provider adds probes for mutexes, reader/writer and shared/exclusive locks to gather contention statistics and other locking information for dtrace scripts, the lockstat(1M) command and other potential consumers. Reviewed by: attilio jhb jb Approved by: gnn (mentor)
2009-05-26 20:28:22 +00:00
LOCKSTAT_RECORD1(LS_THREAD_LOCK_SPIN, m, spin_cnt);
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
}
struct mtx *
thread_lock_block(struct thread *td)
{
struct mtx *lock;
THREAD_LOCK_ASSERT(td, MA_OWNED);
- Placing the 'volatile' on the right side of the * in the td_lock declaration removes the need for __DEVOLATILE(). Pointed out by: tegge
2007-06-06 03:40:47 +00:00
lock = td->td_lock;
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
td->td_lock = &blocked_lock;
mtx_unlock_spin(lock);
return (lock);
}
void
thread_lock_unblock(struct thread *td, struct mtx *new)
{
mtx_assert(new, MA_OWNED);
MPASS(td->td_lock == &blocked_lock);
Propagate volatile qualifier to make gcc4.2 happy.
2007-06-09 18:09:37 +00:00
atomic_store_rel_ptr((volatile void *)&td->td_lock, (uintptr_t)new);
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
}
void
thread_lock_set(struct thread *td, struct mtx *new)
{
struct mtx *lock;
mtx_assert(new, MA_OWNED);
THREAD_LOCK_ASSERT(td, MA_OWNED);
- Placing the 'volatile' on the right side of the * in the td_lock declaration removes the need for __DEVOLATILE(). Pointed out by: tegge
2007-06-06 03:40:47 +00:00
lock = td->td_lock;
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
td->td_lock = new;
mtx_unlock_spin(lock);
}
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
/*
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
* __mtx_unlock_sleep: the tougher part of releasing an MTX_DEF lock.
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
*
* We are only called here if the lock is recursed or contested (i.e. we
* need to wake up a blocked thread).
*/
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
void
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
__mtx_unlock_sleep(volatile uintptr_t *c, int opts, const char *file, int line)
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
{
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
struct mtx *m;
Add an implementation of turnstiles and change the sleep mutex code to use turnstiles to implement blocking isntead of implementing a thread queue directly. These turnstiles are somewhat similar to those used in Solaris 7 as described in Solaris Internals but are also different. Turnstiles do not come out of a fixed-sized pool. Rather, each thread is assigned a turnstile when it is created that it frees when it is destroyed. When a thread blocks on a lock, it donates its turnstile to that lock to serve as queue of blocked threads. The queue associated with a given lock is found by a lookup in a simple hash table. The turnstile itself is protected by a lock associated with its entry in the hash table. This means that sched_lock is no longer needed to contest on a mutex. Instead, sched_lock is only used when manipulating run queues or thread priorities. Turnstiles also implement priority propagation inherently. Currently turnstiles only support mutexes. Eventually, however, turnstiles may grow two queue's to support a non-sleepable reader/writer lock implementation. For more details, see the comments in sys/turnstile.h and kern/subr_turnstile.c. The two primary advantages from the turnstile code include: 1) the size of struct mutex shrinks by four pointers as it no longer stores the thread queue linkages directly, and 2) less contention on sched_lock in SMP systems including the ability for multiple CPUs to contend on different locks simultaneously (not that this last detail is necessarily that much of a big win). Note that 1) means that this commit is a kernel ABI breaker, so don't mix old modules with a new kernel and vice versa. Tested on: i386 SMP, sparc64 SMP, alpha SMP
2003-11-11 22:07:29 +00:00
struct turnstile *ts;
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
panic: add a switch and infrastructure for stopping other CPUs in SMP case Historical behavior of letting other CPUs merily go on is a default for time being. The new behavior can be switched on via kern.stop_scheduler_on_panic tunable and sysctl. Stopping of the CPUs has (at least) the following benefits: - more of the system state at panic time is preserved intact - threads and interrupts do not interfere with dumping of the system state Only one thread runs uninterrupted after panic if stop_scheduler_on_panic is set. That thread might call code that is also used in normal context and that code might use locks to prevent concurrent execution of certain parts. Those locks might be held by the stopped threads and would never be released. To work around this issue, it was decided that instead of explicit checks for panic context, we would rather put those checks inside the locking primitives. This change has substantial portions written and re-written by attilio and kib at various times. Other changes are heavily based on the ideas and patches submitted by jhb and mdf. bde has provided many insights into the details and history of the current code. The new behavior may cause problems for systems that use a USB keyboard for interfacing with system console. This is because of some unusual locking patterns in the ukbd code which have to be used because on one hand ukbd is below syscons, but on the other hand it has to interface with other usb code that uses regular mutexes/Giant for its concurrency protection. Dumping to USB-connected disks may also be affected. PR: amd64/139614 (at least) In cooperation with: attilio, jhb, kib, mdf Discussed with: arch@, bde Tested by: Eugene Grosbein <eugen@grosbein.net>, gnn, Steven Hartland <killing@multiplay.co.uk>, glebius, Andrew Boyer <aboyer@averesystems.com> (various versions of the patch) MFC after: 3 months (or never)
2011-12-11 21:02:01 +00:00
if (SCHEDULER_STOPPED())
return;
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
m = mtxlock2mtx(c);
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
if (mtx_recursed(m)) {
if (--(m->mtx_recurse) == 0)
atomic_clear_ptr(&m->mtx_lock, MTX_RECURSED);
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
if (LOCK_LOG_TEST(&m->lock_object, opts))
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
CTR1(KTR_LOCK, "_mtx_unlock_sleep: %p unrecurse", m);
return;
}
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
/*
* We have to lock the chain before the turnstile so this turnstile
* can be removed from the hash list if it is empty.
*/
turnstile_chain_lock(&m->lock_object);
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
ts = turnstile_lookup(&m->lock_object);
if (LOCK_LOG_TEST(&m->lock_object, opts))
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
CTR1(KTR_LOCK, "_mtx_unlock_sleep: %p contested", m);
Add an implementation of turnstiles and change the sleep mutex code to use turnstiles to implement blocking isntead of implementing a thread queue directly. These turnstiles are somewhat similar to those used in Solaris 7 as described in Solaris Internals but are also different. Turnstiles do not come out of a fixed-sized pool. Rather, each thread is assigned a turnstile when it is created that it frees when it is destroyed. When a thread blocks on a lock, it donates its turnstile to that lock to serve as queue of blocked threads. The queue associated with a given lock is found by a lookup in a simple hash table. The turnstile itself is protected by a lock associated with its entry in the hash table. This means that sched_lock is no longer needed to contest on a mutex. Instead, sched_lock is only used when manipulating run queues or thread priorities. Turnstiles also implement priority propagation inherently. Currently turnstiles only support mutexes. Eventually, however, turnstiles may grow two queue's to support a non-sleepable reader/writer lock implementation. For more details, see the comments in sys/turnstile.h and kern/subr_turnstile.c. The two primary advantages from the turnstile code include: 1) the size of struct mutex shrinks by four pointers as it no longer stores the thread queue linkages directly, and 2) less contention on sched_lock in SMP systems including the ability for multiple CPUs to contend on different locks simultaneously (not that this last detail is necessarily that much of a big win). Note that 1) means that this commit is a kernel ABI breaker, so don't mix old modules with a new kernel and vice versa. Tested on: i386 SMP, sparc64 SMP, alpha SMP
2003-11-11 22:07:29 +00:00
MPASS(ts != NULL);
- Add support for having both a shared and exclusive queue of threads in each turnstile. Also, allow for the owner thread pointer of a turnstile to be NULL. This is needed for the upcoming reader/writer lock implementation. - Add a new ddb command 'show turnstile' that will look up the turnstile associated with the given lock argument and display useful information like the list of threads blocked on each queue, etc. If there isn't an active turnstile for a lock at the specified address, then the function will see if there is an active turnstile at the specified address and display info about it if so. - Adjust the mutex code to handle the turnstile API changes. Tested on: i386 (all), alpha, amd64, sparc64 (1 and 3)
2006-01-27 22:42:12 +00:00
turnstile_broadcast(ts, TS_EXCLUSIVE_QUEUE);
- Remove <machine/mutex.h>. Most of the headers were empty, and the contents of the ones that were not empty were stale and unused. - Now that <machine/mutex.h> no longer exists, there is no need to allow it to override various helper macros in <sys/mutex.h>. - Rename various helper macros for low-level operations on mutexes to live in the _mtx_* or __mtx_* namespaces. While here, change the names to more closely match the real API functions they are backing. - Drop support for including <sys/mutex.h> in assembly source files. Suggested by: bde (1, 2)
2010-11-09 20:46:41 +00:00
_mtx_release_lock_quick(m);
Various whitespace fixes.
2008-09-10 17:59:21 +00:00
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
/*
* This turnstile is now no longer associated with the mutex. We can
* unlock the chain lock so a new turnstile may take it's place.
*/
- Add support for having both a shared and exclusive queue of threads in each turnstile. Also, allow for the owner thread pointer of a turnstile to be NULL. This is needed for the upcoming reader/writer lock implementation. - Add a new ddb command 'show turnstile' that will look up the turnstile associated with the given lock argument and display useful information like the list of threads blocked on each queue, etc. If there isn't an active turnstile for a lock at the specified address, then the function will see if there is an active turnstile at the specified address and display info about it if so. - Adjust the mutex code to handle the turnstile API changes. Tested on: i386 (all), alpha, amd64, sparc64 (1 and 3)
2006-01-27 22:42:12 +00:00
turnstile_unpend(ts, TS_EXCLUSIVE_LOCK);
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
turnstile_chain_unlock(&m->lock_object);
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
}
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
/*
* All the unlocking of MTX_SPIN locks is done inline.
- Remove <machine/mutex.h>. Most of the headers were empty, and the contents of the ones that were not empty were stale and unused. - Now that <machine/mutex.h> no longer exists, there is no need to allow it to override various helper macros in <sys/mutex.h>. - Rename various helper macros for low-level operations on mutexes to live in the _mtx_* or __mtx_* namespaces. While here, change the names to more closely match the real API functions they are backing. - Drop support for including <sys/mutex.h> in assembly source files. Suggested by: bde (1, 2)
2010-11-09 20:46:41 +00:00
* See the __mtx_unlock_spin() macro for the details.
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
*/
/*
- Axe RETIP() as it was very i386 specific and unwieldy. Instead, use the passed in filename and line number in the KTR tracepoint message. - Even though it is #if 0'd code, change the code to detect that a process is an interrupt thread to check p->p_ithd against NULL rather than checking non-existant process flags from BSD/OS. - Use '%p' to print pointers in KTR log messages instead of assuming sizeof(int) == sizeof(void *). - Don't set p_mtxname to NULL when releasing a mutex. It doesn't hurt to leave it set (we don't clear w_mesg for example) and at least at one time in the past, there used to be race conditions in the kernel that would result in setting this to NULL causing the kernel to dereference NULL. - Make the _mtx_assert() function be compiled in if INVARIANTS_SUPPORT is defined rather than if INVARIANTS is defined so that a KLD compiled with INVARIANTS that uses mtx_assert() can be used with a kernel that just has INVARIANT_SUPPORT compiled in.
2001-02-24 19:36:13 +00:00
* The backing function for the INVARIANTS-enabled mtx_assert()
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
*/
Grrr, s/INVARIANTS_SUPPORT/INVARIANT_SUPPORT/.
2001-02-24 21:29:32 +00:00
#ifdef INVARIANT_SUPPORT
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
void
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
__mtx_assert(const volatile uintptr_t *c, int what, const char *file, int line)
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
{
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
const struct mtx *m;
If we have already panic'd then don't bother enforcing mutex asserts as things are pretty much shot already and all panic'ing does is hurt our chances of getting a dump. Inspired by: sheldonh
2001-07-31 17:45:50 +00:00
Ignore mutex asserts when we're dumping as well. This allows me to panic a system from DDB when INVARIANTS is compiled into the kernel on a scsi system.
2005-07-30 05:54:30 +00:00
if (panicstr != NULL || dumping)
If we have already panic'd then don't bother enforcing mutex asserts as things are pretty much shot already and all panic'ing does is hurt our chances of getting a dump. Inspired by: sheldonh
2001-07-31 17:45:50 +00:00
return;
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
m = mtxlock2mtx(c);
Remove brackets around variables in a function that used to be a macro.
2001-02-25 16:18:13 +00:00
switch (what) {
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
case MA_OWNED:
case MA_OWNED | MA_RECURSED:
case MA_OWNED | MA_NOTRECURSED:
Remove brackets around variables in a function that used to be a macro.
2001-02-25 16:18:13 +00:00
if (!mtx_owned(m))
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
panic("mutex %s not owned at %s:%d",
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
m->lock_object.lo_name, file, line);
Remove brackets around variables in a function that used to be a macro.
2001-02-25 16:18:13 +00:00
if (mtx_recursed(m)) {
if ((what & MA_NOTRECURSED) != 0)
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
panic("mutex %s recursed at %s:%d",
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
m->lock_object.lo_name, file, line);
Remove brackets around variables in a function that used to be a macro.
2001-02-25 16:18:13 +00:00
} else if ((what & MA_RECURSED) != 0) {
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
panic("mutex %s unrecursed at %s:%d",
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
m->lock_object.lo_name, file, line);
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
}
break;
case MA_NOTOWNED:
Remove brackets around variables in a function that used to be a macro.
2001-02-25 16:18:13 +00:00
if (mtx_owned(m))
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
panic("mutex %s owned at %s:%d",
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
m->lock_object.lo_name, file, line);
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
break;
default:
Print correct file name and line number in mtx_assert(). Noticed by: jake
2001-01-22 05:56:55 +00:00
panic("unknown mtx_assert at %s:%d", file, line);
Move most of sys/mutex.h into kern/kern_mutex.c, thereby making the mutex inline functions non-inlined. Hide parts of the mutex implementation that should not be exposed. Make sure that WITNESS code is not executed during boot until the mutexes are fully initialized by SI_SUB_MUTEX (the original motivation for this commit). Submitted by: peter
2001-01-21 22:34:43 +00:00
}
}
#endif
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
/*
* The MUTEX_DEBUG-enabled mtx_validate()
Rework the witness code to work with sx locks as well as mutexes. - Introduce lock classes and lock objects. Each lock class specifies a name and set of flags (or properties) shared by all locks of a given type. Currently there are three lock classes: spin mutexes, sleep mutexes, and sx locks. A lock object specifies properties of an additional lock along with a lock name and all of the extra stuff needed to make witness work with a given lock. This abstract lock stuff is defined in sys/lock.h. The lockmgr constants, types, and prototypes have been moved to sys/lockmgr.h. For temporary backwards compatability, sys/lock.h includes sys/lockmgr.h. - Replace proc->p_spinlocks with a per-CPU list, PCPU(spinlocks), of spin locks held. By making this per-cpu, we do not have to jump through magic hoops to deal with sched_lock changing ownership during context switches. - Replace proc->p_heldmtx, formerly a list of held sleep mutexes, with proc->p_sleeplocks, which is a list of held sleep locks including sleep mutexes and sx locks. - Add helper macros for logging lock events via the KTR_LOCK KTR logging level so that the log messages are consistent. - Add some new flags that can be passed to mtx_init(): - MTX_NOWITNESS - specifies that this lock should be ignored by witness. This is used for the mutex that blocks a sx lock for example. - MTX_QUIET - this is not new, but you can pass this to mtx_init() now and no events will be logged for this lock, so that one doesn't have to change all the individual mtx_lock/unlock() operations. - All lock objects maintain an initialized flag. Use this flag to export a mtx_initialized() macro that can be safely called from drivers. Also, we on longer walk the all_mtx list if MUTEX_DEBUG is defined as witness performs the corresponding checks using the initialized flag. - The lock order reversal messages have been improved to output slightly more accurate file and line numbers.
2001-03-28 09:03:24 +00:00
*
* Most of these checks have been moved off into the LO_INITIALIZED flag
* maintained by the witness code.
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
*/
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
#ifdef MUTEX_DEBUG
Remove __P.
2002-03-19 21:25:46 +00:00
void mtx_validate(struct mtx *);
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
Rework the witness code to work with sx locks as well as mutexes. - Introduce lock classes and lock objects. Each lock class specifies a name and set of flags (or properties) shared by all locks of a given type. Currently there are three lock classes: spin mutexes, sleep mutexes, and sx locks. A lock object specifies properties of an additional lock along with a lock name and all of the extra stuff needed to make witness work with a given lock. This abstract lock stuff is defined in sys/lock.h. The lockmgr constants, types, and prototypes have been moved to sys/lockmgr.h. For temporary backwards compatability, sys/lock.h includes sys/lockmgr.h. - Replace proc->p_spinlocks with a per-CPU list, PCPU(spinlocks), of spin locks held. By making this per-cpu, we do not have to jump through magic hoops to deal with sched_lock changing ownership during context switches. - Replace proc->p_heldmtx, formerly a list of held sleep mutexes, with proc->p_sleeplocks, which is a list of held sleep locks including sleep mutexes and sx locks. - Add helper macros for logging lock events via the KTR_LOCK KTR logging level so that the log messages are consistent. - Add some new flags that can be passed to mtx_init(): - MTX_NOWITNESS - specifies that this lock should be ignored by witness. This is used for the mutex that blocks a sx lock for example. - MTX_QUIET - this is not new, but you can pass this to mtx_init() now and no events will be logged for this lock, so that one doesn't have to change all the individual mtx_lock/unlock() operations. - All lock objects maintain an initialized flag. Use this flag to export a mtx_initialized() macro that can be safely called from drivers. Also, we on longer walk the all_mtx list if MUTEX_DEBUG is defined as witness performs the corresponding checks using the initialized flag. - The lock order reversal messages have been improved to output slightly more accurate file and line numbers.
2001-03-28 09:03:24 +00:00
void
mtx_validate(struct mtx *m)
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
{
Disable the kernacc() check in mtx_validate() until such time that kernacc does not require Giant. This means that we may miss panics on a class of mutex programming bugs, but only if running with a Chernobyl setting of debug-flags. Spotted by: Pete Carah <pete@ns.altadena.net>
2002-10-25 08:40:20 +00:00
/*
* XXX: When kernacc() does not require Giant we can reenable this check
*/
#ifdef notyet
Force a commit on kern_mutex.c to explain reason for last commit but while I'm at it also add a comment in mtx_validate() explaining the purpose of the last change. Basically, this fixes booting kernels compiled with MUTEX_DEBUG. What used to happen is before we setidt from init386() [still using BTX idt], we called mtx_init() on several mutex locks, notably Giant and some others. This is a problem for MUTEX_DEBUG because it enables mtx_validate() which calls kernacc(), some of which in turn requires Giant. Fix by calling kernacc() from mtx_validate() only if (!cold).
2001-08-24 23:00:59 +00:00
/*
* Can't call kernacc() from early init386(), especially when
* initializing Giant mutex, because some stuff in kernacc()
* requires Giant itself.
Whitespace cleanup.
2002-10-23 10:26:54 +00:00
*/
*** empty log message ***
2001-08-24 22:53:45 +00:00
if (!cold)
if (!kernacc((caddr_t)m, sizeof(m),
VM_PROT_READ | VM_PROT_WRITE))
panic("Can't read and write to mutex %p", m);
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
#endif
}
#endif
- Add MTX_SYSINIT and SX_SYSINIT as macro glue for allowing sx and mtx locks to be able to setup a SYSINIT call. This helps in places where a lock is needed to protect some data, but the data is not truly associated with a subsystem that can properly initialize it's lock. The macros use the mtx_sysinit() and sx_sysinit() functions, respectively, as the handler argument to SYSINIT(). Reviewed by: alfred, jhb, smp@
2002-04-02 16:05:43 +00:00
/*
* General init routine used by the MTX_SYSINIT() macro.
*/
void
mtx_sysinit(void *arg)
{
struct mtx_args *margs = arg;
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
mtx_init((struct mtx *)margs->ma_mtx, margs->ma_desc, NULL,
margs->ma_opts);
- Add MTX_SYSINIT and SX_SYSINIT as macro glue for allowing sx and mtx locks to be able to setup a SYSINIT call. This helps in places where a lock is needed to protect some data, but the data is not truly associated with a subsystem that can properly initialize it's lock. The macros use the mtx_sysinit() and sx_sysinit() functions, respectively, as the handler argument to SYSINIT(). Reviewed by: alfred, jhb, smp@
2002-04-02 16:05:43 +00:00
}
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
/*
* Mutex initialization routine; initialize lock `m' of type contained in
Change mtx_init() to now take an extra argument. The third argument is the generic lock type for use with witness. If this argument is NULL then the lock name is used as the lock type. Add a macro for a lock type name for network driver locks.
2002-04-04 20:52:27 +00:00
* `opts' with options contained in `opts' and name `name.' The optional
* lock type `type' is used as a general lock category name for use with
* witness.
Whitespace cleanup.
2002-10-23 10:26:54 +00:00
*/
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
void
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
_mtx_init(volatile uintptr_t *c, const char *name, const char *type, int opts)
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
{
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
struct mtx *m;
Add a new file (kern/subr_lock.c) for holding code related to struct lock_obj objects: - Add new lock_init() and lock_destroy() functions to setup and teardown lock_object objects including KTR logging and registering with WITNESS. - Move all the handling of LO_INITIALIZED out of witness and the various lock init functions into lock_init() and lock_destroy(). - Remove the constants for static indices into the lock_classes[] array and change the code outside of subr_lock.c to use LOCK_CLASS to compare against a known lock class. - Move the 'show lock' ddb function and lock_classes[] array out of kern_mutex.c over to subr_lock.c.
2006-01-17 16:55:17 +00:00
struct lock_class *class;
int flags;
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
m = mtxlock2mtx(c);
Rework the witness code to work with sx locks as well as mutexes. - Introduce lock classes and lock objects. Each lock class specifies a name and set of flags (or properties) shared by all locks of a given type. Currently there are three lock classes: spin mutexes, sleep mutexes, and sx locks. A lock object specifies properties of an additional lock along with a lock name and all of the extra stuff needed to make witness work with a given lock. This abstract lock stuff is defined in sys/lock.h. The lockmgr constants, types, and prototypes have been moved to sys/lockmgr.h. For temporary backwards compatability, sys/lock.h includes sys/lockmgr.h. - Replace proc->p_spinlocks with a per-CPU list, PCPU(spinlocks), of spin locks held. By making this per-cpu, we do not have to jump through magic hoops to deal with sched_lock changing ownership during context switches. - Replace proc->p_heldmtx, formerly a list of held sleep mutexes, with proc->p_sleeplocks, which is a list of held sleep locks including sleep mutexes and sx locks. - Add helper macros for logging lock events via the KTR_LOCK KTR logging level so that the log messages are consistent. - Add some new flags that can be passed to mtx_init(): - MTX_NOWITNESS - specifies that this lock should be ignored by witness. This is used for the mutex that blocks a sx lock for example. - MTX_QUIET - this is not new, but you can pass this to mtx_init() now and no events will be logged for this lock, so that one doesn't have to change all the individual mtx_lock/unlock() operations. - All lock objects maintain an initialized flag. Use this flag to export a mtx_initialized() macro that can be safely called from drivers. Also, we on longer walk the all_mtx list if MUTEX_DEBUG is defined as witness performs the corresponding checks using the initialized flag. - The lock order reversal messages have been improved to output slightly more accurate file and line numbers.
2001-03-28 09:03:24 +00:00
MPASS((opts & ~(MTX_SPIN | MTX_QUIET | MTX_RECURSE |
MUTEX_PROFILING has been generalized to LOCK_PROFILING. We now profile wait (time waited to acquire) and hold times for *all* kernel locks. If the architecture has a system synchronized TSC, the profiling code will use that - thereby minimizing profiling overhead. Large chunks of profiling code have been moved out of line, the overhead measured on the T1 for when it is compiled in but not enabled is < 1%. Approved by: scottl (standing in for mentor rwatson) Reviewed by: des and jhb
2006-11-11 03:18:07 +00:00
MTX_NOWITNESS | MTX_DUPOK | MTX_NOPROFILE)) == 0);
* Change the scope of the ASSERT_ATOMIC_LOAD() from a generic check to a pointer-fetching specific operation check. Consequently, rename the operation ASSERT_ATOMIC_LOAD_PTR(). * Fix the implementation of ASSERT_ATOMIC_LOAD_PTR() by checking directly alignment on the word boundry, for all the given specific architectures. That's a bit too strict for some common case, but it assures safety. * Add a comment explaining the scope of the macro * Add a new stub in the lockmgr specific implementation Tested by: marcel (initial version), marius Reviewed by: rwatson, jhb (comment specific review) Approved by: re (kib)
2009-08-17 16:17:21 +00:00
ASSERT_ATOMIC_LOAD_PTR(m->mtx_lock,
("%s: mtx_lock not aligned for %s: %p", __func__, name,
&m->mtx_lock));
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
#ifdef MUTEX_DEBUG
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
/* Diagnostic and error correction */
Rework the witness code to work with sx locks as well as mutexes. - Introduce lock classes and lock objects. Each lock class specifies a name and set of flags (or properties) shared by all locks of a given type. Currently there are three lock classes: spin mutexes, sleep mutexes, and sx locks. A lock object specifies properties of an additional lock along with a lock name and all of the extra stuff needed to make witness work with a given lock. This abstract lock stuff is defined in sys/lock.h. The lockmgr constants, types, and prototypes have been moved to sys/lockmgr.h. For temporary backwards compatability, sys/lock.h includes sys/lockmgr.h. - Replace proc->p_spinlocks with a per-CPU list, PCPU(spinlocks), of spin locks held. By making this per-cpu, we do not have to jump through magic hoops to deal with sched_lock changing ownership during context switches. - Replace proc->p_heldmtx, formerly a list of held sleep mutexes, with proc->p_sleeplocks, which is a list of held sleep locks including sleep mutexes and sx locks. - Add helper macros for logging lock events via the KTR_LOCK KTR logging level so that the log messages are consistent. - Add some new flags that can be passed to mtx_init(): - MTX_NOWITNESS - specifies that this lock should be ignored by witness. This is used for the mutex that blocks a sx lock for example. - MTX_QUIET - this is not new, but you can pass this to mtx_init() now and no events will be logged for this lock, so that one doesn't have to change all the individual mtx_lock/unlock() operations. - All lock objects maintain an initialized flag. Use this flag to export a mtx_initialized() macro that can be safely called from drivers. Also, we on longer walk the all_mtx list if MUTEX_DEBUG is defined as witness performs the corresponding checks using the initialized flag. - The lock order reversal messages have been improved to output slightly more accurate file and line numbers.
2001-03-28 09:03:24 +00:00
mtx_validate(m);
Split the WITNESS and MUTEX_DEBUG options apart so that WITNESS does not depend on MUTEX_DEBUG. The MUTEX_DEBUG option turns on extra assertions and checks to verify that mutexes themselves are implemented properly. The WITNESS option uses extra checks and diagnostics to verify that other code is using mutexes properly.
2000-12-01 00:10:59 +00:00
#endif
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
Add a new file (kern/subr_lock.c) for holding code related to struct lock_obj objects: - Add new lock_init() and lock_destroy() functions to setup and teardown lock_object objects including KTR logging and registering with WITNESS. - Move all the handling of LO_INITIALIZED out of witness and the various lock init functions into lock_init() and lock_destroy(). - Remove the constants for static indices into the lock_classes[] array and change the code outside of subr_lock.c to use LOCK_CLASS to compare against a known lock class. - Move the 'show lock' ddb function and lock_classes[] array out of kern_mutex.c over to subr_lock.c.
2006-01-17 16:55:17 +00:00
/* Determine lock class and lock flags. */
Rework the witness code to work with sx locks as well as mutexes. - Introduce lock classes and lock objects. Each lock class specifies a name and set of flags (or properties) shared by all locks of a given type. Currently there are three lock classes: spin mutexes, sleep mutexes, and sx locks. A lock object specifies properties of an additional lock along with a lock name and all of the extra stuff needed to make witness work with a given lock. This abstract lock stuff is defined in sys/lock.h. The lockmgr constants, types, and prototypes have been moved to sys/lockmgr.h. For temporary backwards compatability, sys/lock.h includes sys/lockmgr.h. - Replace proc->p_spinlocks with a per-CPU list, PCPU(spinlocks), of spin locks held. By making this per-cpu, we do not have to jump through magic hoops to deal with sched_lock changing ownership during context switches. - Replace proc->p_heldmtx, formerly a list of held sleep mutexes, with proc->p_sleeplocks, which is a list of held sleep locks including sleep mutexes and sx locks. - Add helper macros for logging lock events via the KTR_LOCK KTR logging level so that the log messages are consistent. - Add some new flags that can be passed to mtx_init(): - MTX_NOWITNESS - specifies that this lock should be ignored by witness. This is used for the mutex that blocks a sx lock for example. - MTX_QUIET - this is not new, but you can pass this to mtx_init() now and no events will be logged for this lock, so that one doesn't have to change all the individual mtx_lock/unlock() operations. - All lock objects maintain an initialized flag. Use this flag to export a mtx_initialized() macro that can be safely called from drivers. Also, we on longer walk the all_mtx list if MUTEX_DEBUG is defined as witness performs the corresponding checks using the initialized flag. - The lock order reversal messages have been improved to output slightly more accurate file and line numbers.
2001-03-28 09:03:24 +00:00
if (opts & MTX_SPIN)
Add a new file (kern/subr_lock.c) for holding code related to struct lock_obj objects: - Add new lock_init() and lock_destroy() functions to setup and teardown lock_object objects including KTR logging and registering with WITNESS. - Move all the handling of LO_INITIALIZED out of witness and the various lock init functions into lock_init() and lock_destroy(). - Remove the constants for static indices into the lock_classes[] array and change the code outside of subr_lock.c to use LOCK_CLASS to compare against a known lock class. - Move the 'show lock' ddb function and lock_classes[] array out of kern_mutex.c over to subr_lock.c.
2006-01-17 16:55:17 +00:00
class = &lock_class_mtx_spin;
Rework the witness code to work with sx locks as well as mutexes. - Introduce lock classes and lock objects. Each lock class specifies a name and set of flags (or properties) shared by all locks of a given type. Currently there are three lock classes: spin mutexes, sleep mutexes, and sx locks. A lock object specifies properties of an additional lock along with a lock name and all of the extra stuff needed to make witness work with a given lock. This abstract lock stuff is defined in sys/lock.h. The lockmgr constants, types, and prototypes have been moved to sys/lockmgr.h. For temporary backwards compatability, sys/lock.h includes sys/lockmgr.h. - Replace proc->p_spinlocks with a per-CPU list, PCPU(spinlocks), of spin locks held. By making this per-cpu, we do not have to jump through magic hoops to deal with sched_lock changing ownership during context switches. - Replace proc->p_heldmtx, formerly a list of held sleep mutexes, with proc->p_sleeplocks, which is a list of held sleep locks including sleep mutexes and sx locks. - Add helper macros for logging lock events via the KTR_LOCK KTR logging level so that the log messages are consistent. - Add some new flags that can be passed to mtx_init(): - MTX_NOWITNESS - specifies that this lock should be ignored by witness. This is used for the mutex that blocks a sx lock for example. - MTX_QUIET - this is not new, but you can pass this to mtx_init() now and no events will be logged for this lock, so that one doesn't have to change all the individual mtx_lock/unlock() operations. - All lock objects maintain an initialized flag. Use this flag to export a mtx_initialized() macro that can be safely called from drivers. Also, we on longer walk the all_mtx list if MUTEX_DEBUG is defined as witness performs the corresponding checks using the initialized flag. - The lock order reversal messages have been improved to output slightly more accurate file and line numbers.
2001-03-28 09:03:24 +00:00
else
Add a new file (kern/subr_lock.c) for holding code related to struct lock_obj objects: - Add new lock_init() and lock_destroy() functions to setup and teardown lock_object objects including KTR logging and registering with WITNESS. - Move all the handling of LO_INITIALIZED out of witness and the various lock init functions into lock_init() and lock_destroy(). - Remove the constants for static indices into the lock_classes[] array and change the code outside of subr_lock.c to use LOCK_CLASS to compare against a known lock class. - Move the 'show lock' ddb function and lock_classes[] array out of kern_mutex.c over to subr_lock.c.
2006-01-17 16:55:17 +00:00
class = &lock_class_mtx_sleep;
flags = 0;
Rework the witness code to work with sx locks as well as mutexes. - Introduce lock classes and lock objects. Each lock class specifies a name and set of flags (or properties) shared by all locks of a given type. Currently there are three lock classes: spin mutexes, sleep mutexes, and sx locks. A lock object specifies properties of an additional lock along with a lock name and all of the extra stuff needed to make witness work with a given lock. This abstract lock stuff is defined in sys/lock.h. The lockmgr constants, types, and prototypes have been moved to sys/lockmgr.h. For temporary backwards compatability, sys/lock.h includes sys/lockmgr.h. - Replace proc->p_spinlocks with a per-CPU list, PCPU(spinlocks), of spin locks held. By making this per-cpu, we do not have to jump through magic hoops to deal with sched_lock changing ownership during context switches. - Replace proc->p_heldmtx, formerly a list of held sleep mutexes, with proc->p_sleeplocks, which is a list of held sleep locks including sleep mutexes and sx locks. - Add helper macros for logging lock events via the KTR_LOCK KTR logging level so that the log messages are consistent. - Add some new flags that can be passed to mtx_init(): - MTX_NOWITNESS - specifies that this lock should be ignored by witness. This is used for the mutex that blocks a sx lock for example. - MTX_QUIET - this is not new, but you can pass this to mtx_init() now and no events will be logged for this lock, so that one doesn't have to change all the individual mtx_lock/unlock() operations. - All lock objects maintain an initialized flag. Use this flag to export a mtx_initialized() macro that can be safely called from drivers. Also, we on longer walk the all_mtx list if MUTEX_DEBUG is defined as witness performs the corresponding checks using the initialized flag. - The lock order reversal messages have been improved to output slightly more accurate file and line numbers.
2001-03-28 09:03:24 +00:00
if (opts & MTX_QUIET)
Add a new file (kern/subr_lock.c) for holding code related to struct lock_obj objects: - Add new lock_init() and lock_destroy() functions to setup and teardown lock_object objects including KTR logging and registering with WITNESS. - Move all the handling of LO_INITIALIZED out of witness and the various lock init functions into lock_init() and lock_destroy(). - Remove the constants for static indices into the lock_classes[] array and change the code outside of subr_lock.c to use LOCK_CLASS to compare against a known lock class. - Move the 'show lock' ddb function and lock_classes[] array out of kern_mutex.c over to subr_lock.c.
2006-01-17 16:55:17 +00:00
flags |= LO_QUIET;
Rework the witness code to work with sx locks as well as mutexes. - Introduce lock classes and lock objects. Each lock class specifies a name and set of flags (or properties) shared by all locks of a given type. Currently there are three lock classes: spin mutexes, sleep mutexes, and sx locks. A lock object specifies properties of an additional lock along with a lock name and all of the extra stuff needed to make witness work with a given lock. This abstract lock stuff is defined in sys/lock.h. The lockmgr constants, types, and prototypes have been moved to sys/lockmgr.h. For temporary backwards compatability, sys/lock.h includes sys/lockmgr.h. - Replace proc->p_spinlocks with a per-CPU list, PCPU(spinlocks), of spin locks held. By making this per-cpu, we do not have to jump through magic hoops to deal with sched_lock changing ownership during context switches. - Replace proc->p_heldmtx, formerly a list of held sleep mutexes, with proc->p_sleeplocks, which is a list of held sleep locks including sleep mutexes and sx locks. - Add helper macros for logging lock events via the KTR_LOCK KTR logging level so that the log messages are consistent. - Add some new flags that can be passed to mtx_init(): - MTX_NOWITNESS - specifies that this lock should be ignored by witness. This is used for the mutex that blocks a sx lock for example. - MTX_QUIET - this is not new, but you can pass this to mtx_init() now and no events will be logged for this lock, so that one doesn't have to change all the individual mtx_lock/unlock() operations. - All lock objects maintain an initialized flag. Use this flag to export a mtx_initialized() macro that can be safely called from drivers. Also, we on longer walk the all_mtx list if MUTEX_DEBUG is defined as witness performs the corresponding checks using the initialized flag. - The lock order reversal messages have been improved to output slightly more accurate file and line numbers.
2001-03-28 09:03:24 +00:00
if (opts & MTX_RECURSE)
Add a new file (kern/subr_lock.c) for holding code related to struct lock_obj objects: - Add new lock_init() and lock_destroy() functions to setup and teardown lock_object objects including KTR logging and registering with WITNESS. - Move all the handling of LO_INITIALIZED out of witness and the various lock init functions into lock_init() and lock_destroy(). - Remove the constants for static indices into the lock_classes[] array and change the code outside of subr_lock.c to use LOCK_CLASS to compare against a known lock class. - Move the 'show lock' ddb function and lock_classes[] array out of kern_mutex.c over to subr_lock.c.
2006-01-17 16:55:17 +00:00
flags |= LO_RECURSABLE;
Rework the witness code to work with sx locks as well as mutexes. - Introduce lock classes and lock objects. Each lock class specifies a name and set of flags (or properties) shared by all locks of a given type. Currently there are three lock classes: spin mutexes, sleep mutexes, and sx locks. A lock object specifies properties of an additional lock along with a lock name and all of the extra stuff needed to make witness work with a given lock. This abstract lock stuff is defined in sys/lock.h. The lockmgr constants, types, and prototypes have been moved to sys/lockmgr.h. For temporary backwards compatability, sys/lock.h includes sys/lockmgr.h. - Replace proc->p_spinlocks with a per-CPU list, PCPU(spinlocks), of spin locks held. By making this per-cpu, we do not have to jump through magic hoops to deal with sched_lock changing ownership during context switches. - Replace proc->p_heldmtx, formerly a list of held sleep mutexes, with proc->p_sleeplocks, which is a list of held sleep locks including sleep mutexes and sx locks. - Add helper macros for logging lock events via the KTR_LOCK KTR logging level so that the log messages are consistent. - Add some new flags that can be passed to mtx_init(): - MTX_NOWITNESS - specifies that this lock should be ignored by witness. This is used for the mutex that blocks a sx lock for example. - MTX_QUIET - this is not new, but you can pass this to mtx_init() now and no events will be logged for this lock, so that one doesn't have to change all the individual mtx_lock/unlock() operations. - All lock objects maintain an initialized flag. Use this flag to export a mtx_initialized() macro that can be safely called from drivers. Also, we on longer walk the all_mtx list if MUTEX_DEBUG is defined as witness performs the corresponding checks using the initialized flag. - The lock order reversal messages have been improved to output slightly more accurate file and line numbers.
2001-03-28 09:03:24 +00:00
if ((opts & MTX_NOWITNESS) == 0)
Add a new file (kern/subr_lock.c) for holding code related to struct lock_obj objects: - Add new lock_init() and lock_destroy() functions to setup and teardown lock_object objects including KTR logging and registering with WITNESS. - Move all the handling of LO_INITIALIZED out of witness and the various lock init functions into lock_init() and lock_destroy(). - Remove the constants for static indices into the lock_classes[] array and change the code outside of subr_lock.c to use LOCK_CLASS to compare against a known lock class. - Move the 'show lock' ddb function and lock_classes[] array out of kern_mutex.c over to subr_lock.c.
2006-01-17 16:55:17 +00:00
flags |= LO_WITNESS;
Add a new mtx_init option "MTX_DUPOK" which allows duplicate acquires of locks with this flag. Remove the dup_list and dup_ok code from subr_witness. Now we just check for the flag instead of doing string compares. Also, switch the process lock, process group lock, and uma per cpu locks over to this interface. The original mechanism did not work well for uma because per cpu lock names are unique to each zone. Approved by: jhb
2002-03-27 09:23:41 +00:00
if (opts & MTX_DUPOK)
Add a new file (kern/subr_lock.c) for holding code related to struct lock_obj objects: - Add new lock_init() and lock_destroy() functions to setup and teardown lock_object objects including KTR logging and registering with WITNESS. - Move all the handling of LO_INITIALIZED out of witness and the various lock init functions into lock_init() and lock_destroy(). - Remove the constants for static indices into the lock_classes[] array and change the code outside of subr_lock.c to use LOCK_CLASS to compare against a known lock class. - Move the 'show lock' ddb function and lock_classes[] array out of kern_mutex.c over to subr_lock.c.
2006-01-17 16:55:17 +00:00
flags |= LO_DUPOK;
MUTEX_PROFILING has been generalized to LOCK_PROFILING. We now profile wait (time waited to acquire) and hold times for *all* kernel locks. If the architecture has a system synchronized TSC, the profiling code will use that - thereby minimizing profiling overhead. Large chunks of profiling code have been moved out of line, the overhead measured on the T1 for when it is compiled in but not enabled is < 1%. Approved by: scottl (standing in for mentor rwatson) Reviewed by: des and jhb
2006-11-11 03:18:07 +00:00
if (opts & MTX_NOPROFILE)
flags |= LO_NOPROFILE;
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
Add a new file (kern/subr_lock.c) for holding code related to struct lock_obj objects: - Add new lock_init() and lock_destroy() functions to setup and teardown lock_object objects including KTR logging and registering with WITNESS. - Move all the handling of LO_INITIALIZED out of witness and the various lock init functions into lock_init() and lock_destroy(). - Remove the constants for static indices into the lock_classes[] array and change the code outside of subr_lock.c to use LOCK_CLASS to compare against a known lock class. - Move the 'show lock' ddb function and lock_classes[] array out of kern_mutex.c over to subr_lock.c.
2006-01-17 16:55:17 +00:00
/* Initialize mutex. */
A few mostly cosmetic nits to aid in debugging: - Call lock_init() first before setting any lock_object fields in lock init routines. This way if the machine panics due to a duplicate init the lock's original state is preserved. - Somewhat similarly, don't decrement td_locks and td_slocks until after an unlock operation has completed successfully.
2013-06-25 20:23:08 +00:00
lock_init(&m->lock_object, class, name, type, flags);
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
m->mtx_lock = MTX_UNOWNED;
Add a new file (kern/subr_lock.c) for holding code related to struct lock_obj objects: - Add new lock_init() and lock_destroy() functions to setup and teardown lock_object objects including KTR logging and registering with WITNESS. - Move all the handling of LO_INITIALIZED out of witness and the various lock init functions into lock_init() and lock_destroy(). - Remove the constants for static indices into the lock_classes[] array and change the code outside of subr_lock.c to use LOCK_CLASS to compare against a known lock class. - Move the 'show lock' ddb function and lock_classes[] array out of kern_mutex.c over to subr_lock.c.
2006-01-17 16:55:17 +00:00
m->mtx_recurse = 0;
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
}
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
/*
Rework the witness code to work with sx locks as well as mutexes. - Introduce lock classes and lock objects. Each lock class specifies a name and set of flags (or properties) shared by all locks of a given type. Currently there are three lock classes: spin mutexes, sleep mutexes, and sx locks. A lock object specifies properties of an additional lock along with a lock name and all of the extra stuff needed to make witness work with a given lock. This abstract lock stuff is defined in sys/lock.h. The lockmgr constants, types, and prototypes have been moved to sys/lockmgr.h. For temporary backwards compatability, sys/lock.h includes sys/lockmgr.h. - Replace proc->p_spinlocks with a per-CPU list, PCPU(spinlocks), of spin locks held. By making this per-cpu, we do not have to jump through magic hoops to deal with sched_lock changing ownership during context switches. - Replace proc->p_heldmtx, formerly a list of held sleep mutexes, with proc->p_sleeplocks, which is a list of held sleep locks including sleep mutexes and sx locks. - Add helper macros for logging lock events via the KTR_LOCK KTR logging level so that the log messages are consistent. - Add some new flags that can be passed to mtx_init(): - MTX_NOWITNESS - specifies that this lock should be ignored by witness. This is used for the mutex that blocks a sx lock for example. - MTX_QUIET - this is not new, but you can pass this to mtx_init() now and no events will be logged for this lock, so that one doesn't have to change all the individual mtx_lock/unlock() operations. - All lock objects maintain an initialized flag. Use this flag to export a mtx_initialized() macro that can be safely called from drivers. Also, we on longer walk the all_mtx list if MUTEX_DEBUG is defined as witness performs the corresponding checks using the initialized flag. - The lock order reversal messages have been improved to output slightly more accurate file and line numbers.
2001-03-28 09:03:24 +00:00
* Remove lock `m' from all_mtx queue. We don't allow MTX_QUIET to be
* passed in as a flag here because if the corresponding mtx_init() was
* called with MTX_QUIET set, then it will already be set in the mutex's
* flags.
Change and clean the mutex lock interface. mtx_enter(lock, type) becomes: mtx_lock(lock) for sleep locks (MTX_DEF-initialized locks) mtx_lock_spin(lock) for spin locks (MTX_SPIN-initialized) similarily, for releasing a lock, we now have: mtx_unlock(lock) for MTX_DEF and mtx_unlock_spin(lock) for MTX_SPIN. We change the caller interface for the two different types of locks because the semantics are entirely different for each case, and this makes it explicitly clear and, at the same time, it rids us of the extra `type' argument. The enter->lock and exit->unlock change has been made with the idea that we're "locking data" and not "entering locked code" in mind. Further, remove all additional "flags" previously passed to the lock acquire/release routines with the exception of two: MTX_QUIET and MTX_NOSWITCH The functionality of these flags is preserved and they can be passed to the lock/unlock routines by calling the corresponding wrappers: mtx_{lock, unlock}_flags(lock, flag(s)) and mtx_{lock, unlock}_spin_flags(lock, flag(s)) for MTX_DEF and MTX_SPIN locks, respectively. Re-inline some lock acq/rel code; in the sleep lock case, we only inline the _obtain_lock()s in order to ensure that the inlined code fits into a cache line. In the spin lock case, we inline recursion and actually only perform a function call if we need to spin. This change has been made with the idea that we generally tend to avoid spin locks and that also the spin locks that we do have and are heavily used (i.e. sched_lock) do recurse, and therefore in an effort to reduce function call overhead for some architectures (such as alpha), we inline recursion for this case. Create a new malloc type for the witness code and retire from using the M_DEV type. The new type is called M_WITNESS and is only declared if WITNESS is enabled. Begin cleaning up some machdep/mutex.h code - specifically updated the "optimized" inlined code in alpha/mutex.h and wrote MTX_LOCK_SPIN and MTX_UNLOCK_SPIN asm macros for the i386/mutex.h as we presently need those. Finally, caught up to the interface changes in all sys code. Contributors: jake, jhb, jasone (in no particular order)
2001-02-09 06:11:45 +00:00
*/
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
void
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
_mtx_destroy(volatile uintptr_t *c)
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
{
Give mtx(9) the ability to crunch different type of structures, with the only constraint that they have a lock cookie named mtx_lock. This name, then, becames reserved from the struct that wants to use the mtx(9) KPI and other locking primitives cannot reuse it for their members. Namely such structs are the current struct mtx and the new struct mtx_padalign. The new structure will define an object which is the same as the same layout of a struct mtx but will be allocated in areas aligned to the cache line size and will be as big as a cache line. This is supposed to give higher performance for highly contented mutexes both spin or sleep (because of the adaptive spinning), where the cache line contention results in too much traffic on the system bus. The struct mtx_padalign can be used in a completely transparent way with the mtx(9) KPI. At the moment, a possibility to MFC the patch should be carefully evaluated because this patch breaks the low level KPI (not its representation though). Discussed with: jhb Reviewed by: jeff, andre Reviewed by: mdf (earlier version) Tested by: jimharris
2012-10-31 13:38:56 +00:00
struct mtx *m;
m = mtxlock2mtx(c);
- Make the mutex code almost completely machine independent. This greatly reducues the maintenance load for the mutex code. The only MD portions of the mutex code are in machine/mutex.h now, which include the assembly macros for handling mutexes as well as optionally overriding the mutex micro-operations. For example, we use optimized micro-ops on the x86 platform #ifndef I386_CPU. - Change the behavior of the SMP_DEBUG kernel option. In the new code, mtx_assert() only depends on INVARIANTS, allowing other kernel developers to have working mutex assertiions without having to include all of the mutex debugging code. The SMP_DEBUG kernel option has been renamed to MUTEX_DEBUG and now just controls extra mutex debugging code. - Abolish the ugly mtx_f hack. Instead, we dynamically allocate seperate mtx_debug structures on the fly in mtx_init, except for mutexes that are initiated very early in the boot process. These mutexes are declared using a special MUTEX_DECLARE() macro, and use a new flag MTX_COLD when calling mtx_init. This is still somewhat hackish, but it is less evil than the mtx_f filler struct, and the mtx struct is now the same size with and without mutex debugging code. - Add some micro-micro-operation macros for doing the actual atomic operations on the mutex mtx_lock field to make it easier for other archs to override/optimize mutex ops if needed. These new tiny ops also clean up the code in some places by replacing long atomic operation function calls that spanned 2-3 lines with a short 1-line macro call. - Don't call mi_switch() from mtx_enter_hard() when we block while trying to obtain a sleep mutex. Calling mi_switch() would bogusly release Giant before switching to the next process. Instead, inline most of the code from mi_switch() in the mtx_enter_hard() function. Note that when we finally kill Giant we can back this out and go back to calling mi_switch().
2000-10-20 07:26:37 +00:00
Rework the witness code to work with sx locks as well as mutexes. - Introduce lock classes and lock objects. Each lock class specifies a name and set of flags (or properties) shared by all locks of a given type. Currently there are three lock classes: spin mutexes, sleep mutexes, and sx locks. A lock object specifies properties of an additional lock along with a lock name and all of the extra stuff needed to make witness work with a given lock. This abstract lock stuff is defined in sys/lock.h. The lockmgr constants, types, and prototypes have been moved to sys/lockmgr.h. For temporary backwards compatability, sys/lock.h includes sys/lockmgr.h. - Replace proc->p_spinlocks with a per-CPU list, PCPU(spinlocks), of spin locks held. By making this per-cpu, we do not have to jump through magic hoops to deal with sched_lock changing ownership during context switches. - Replace proc->p_heldmtx, formerly a list of held sleep mutexes, with proc->p_sleeplocks, which is a list of held sleep locks including sleep mutexes and sx locks. - Add helper macros for logging lock events via the KTR_LOCK KTR logging level so that the log messages are consistent. - Add some new flags that can be passed to mtx_init(): - MTX_NOWITNESS - specifies that this lock should be ignored by witness. This is used for the mutex that blocks a sx lock for example. - MTX_QUIET - this is not new, but you can pass this to mtx_init() now and no events will be logged for this lock, so that one doesn't have to change all the individual mtx_lock/unlock() operations. - All lock objects maintain an initialized flag. Use this flag to export a mtx_initialized() macro that can be safely called from drivers. Also, we on longer walk the all_mtx list if MUTEX_DEBUG is defined as witness performs the corresponding checks using the initialized flag. - The lock order reversal messages have been improved to output slightly more accurate file and line numbers.
2001-03-28 09:03:24 +00:00
if (!mtx_owned(m))
MPASS(mtx_unowned(m));
else {
Implement MTX_RECURSE flag for mtx_init(). All calls to mtx_init() for mutexes that recurse must now include the MTX_RECURSE bit in the flag argument variable. This change is in preparation for an upcoming (further) mutex API cleanup. The witness code will call panic() if a lock is found to recurse but the MTX_RECURSE bit was not set during the lock's initialization. The old MTX_RECURSE "state" bit (in mtx_lock) has been renamed to MTX_RECURSED, which is more appropriate given its meaning. The following locks have been made "recursive," thus far: eventhandler, Giant, callout, sched_lock, possibly some others declared in the architecture-specific code, all of the network card driver locks in pci/, as well as some other locks in dev/ stuff that I've found to be recursive. Reviewed by: jhb
2001-01-19 01:59:14 +00:00
MPASS((m->mtx_lock & (MTX_RECURSED|MTX_CONTESTED)) == 0);
Major update to the way synchronization is done in the kernel. Highlights include: * Mutual exclusion is used instead of spl*(). See mutex(9). (Note: The alpha port is still in transition and currently uses both.) * Per-CPU idle processes. * Interrupts are run in their own separate kernel threads and can be preempted (i386 only). Partially contributed by: BSDi (BSD/OS) Submissions by (at least): cp, dfr, dillon, grog, jake, jhb, sheldonh
2000-09-07 01:33:02 +00:00
If destroying a spinlock, make sure that it is exited properly. Submitted by: jhb MFC After: 3 days
2006-01-08 00:18:34 +00:00
/* Perform the non-mtx related part of mtx_unlock_spin(). */
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
if (LOCK_CLASS(&m->lock_object) == &lock_class_mtx_spin)
If destroying a spinlock, make sure that it is exited properly. Submitted by: jhb MFC After: 3 days
2006-01-08 00:18:34 +00:00
spinlock_exit();
Adjust td_locks for non-spin mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks so that it is a count of all non-spin locks, not just lockmgr locks. This can give us a much cheaper way to see if we have any locks held (such as when returning to userland via userret()) without requiring WITNESS. MFC after: 1 week
2006-07-27 21:45:55 +00:00
else
curthread->td_locks--;
If destroying a spinlock, make sure that it is exited properly. Submitted by: jhb MFC After: 3 days
2006-01-08 00:18:34 +00:00
- When a mutex is destroyed while locked we need to inform lock profiling that it has been released.
2009-03-14 11:43:38 +00:00
lock_profile_release_lock(&m->lock_object);
Rework the witness code to work with sx locks as well as mutexes. - Introduce lock classes and lock objects. Each lock class specifies a name and set of flags (or properties) shared by all locks of a given type. Currently there are three lock classes: spin mutexes, sleep mutexes, and sx locks. A lock object specifies properties of an additional lock along with a lock name and all of the extra stuff needed to make witness work with a given lock. This abstract lock stuff is defined in sys/lock.h. The lockmgr constants, types, and prototypes have been moved to sys/lockmgr.h. For temporary backwards compatability, sys/lock.h includes sys/lockmgr.h. - Replace proc->p_spinlocks with a per-CPU list, PCPU(spinlocks), of spin locks held. By making this per-cpu, we do not have to jump through magic hoops to deal with sched_lock changing ownership during context switches. - Replace proc->p_heldmtx, formerly a list of held sleep mutexes, with proc->p_sleeplocks, which is a list of held sleep locks including sleep mutexes and sx locks. - Add helper macros for logging lock events via the KTR_LOCK KTR logging level so that the log messages are consistent. - Add some new flags that can be passed to mtx_init(): - MTX_NOWITNESS - specifies that this lock should be ignored by witness. This is used for the mutex that blocks a sx lock for example. - MTX_QUIET - this is not new, but you can pass this to mtx_init() now and no events will be logged for this lock, so that one doesn't have to change all the individual mtx_lock/unlock() operations. - All lock objects maintain an initialized flag. Use this flag to export a mtx_initialized() macro that can be safely called from drivers. Also, we on longer walk the all_mtx list if MUTEX_DEBUG is defined as witness performs the corresponding checks using the initialized flag. - The lock order reversal messages have been improved to output slightly more accurate file and line numbers.
2001-03-28 09:03:24 +00:00
/* Tell witness this isn't locked to make it happy. */
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
WITNESS_UNLOCK(&m->lock_object, LOP_EXCLUSIVE, __FILE__,
Change the preemption code for software interrupt thread schedules and mutex releases to not require flags for the cases when preemption is not allowed: The purpose of the MTX_NOSWITCH and SWI_NOSWITCH flags is to prevent switching to a higher priority thread on mutex releease and swi schedule, respectively when that switch is not safe. Now that the critical section API maintains a per-thread nesting count, the kernel can easily check whether or not it should switch without relying on flags from the programmer. This fixes a few bugs in that all current callers of swi_sched() used SWI_NOSWITCH, when in fact, only the ones called from fast interrupt handlers and the swi_sched of softclock needed this flag. Note that to ensure that swi_sched()'s in clock and fast interrupt handlers do not switch, these handlers have to be explicitly wrapped in critical_enter/exit pairs. Presently, just wrapping the handlers is sufficient, but in the future with the fully preemptive kernel, the interrupt must be EOI'd before critical_exit() is called. (critical_exit() can switch due to a deferred preemption in a fully preemptive kernel.) I've tested the changes to the interrupt code on i386 and alpha. I have not tested ia64, but the interrupt code is almost identical to the alpha code, so I expect it will work fine. PowerPC and ARM do not yet have interrupt code in the tree so they shouldn't be broken. Sparc64 is broken, but that's been ok'd by jake and tmm who will be fixing the interrupt code for sparc64 shortly. Reviewed by: peter Tested on: i386, alpha
2002-01-05 08:47:13 +00:00
__LINE__);
Major update to the way synchronization is done in the kernel. Highlights include: * Mutual exclusion is used instead of spl*(). See mutex(9). (Note: The alpha port is still in transition and currently uses both.) * Per-CPU idle processes. * Interrupts are run in their own separate kernel threads and can be preempted (i386 only). Partially contributed by: BSDi (BSD/OS) Submissions by (at least): cp, dfr, dillon, grog, jake, jhb, sheldonh
2000-09-07 01:33:02 +00:00
}
Write a magic value into mtx_lock when destroying a mutex that will force all other mtx_lock() operations to block. Previously, when the mutex was destroyed, it would still have a valid value in mtx_lock(): either the unowned cookie, which would allow a subsequent mtx_lock() to succeed, or a pointer to the thread who destroyed the mutex if the mutex was locked when it was destroyed. MFC after: 3 days
2006-07-27 19:58:18 +00:00
m->mtx_lock = MTX_DESTROYED;
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
lock_destroy(&m->lock_object);
Major update to the way synchronization is done in the kernel. Highlights include: * Mutual exclusion is used instead of spl*(). See mutex(9). (Note: The alpha port is still in transition and currently uses both.) * Per-CPU idle processes. * Interrupts are run in their own separate kernel threads and can be preempted (i386 only). Partially contributed by: BSDi (BSD/OS) Submissions by (at least): cp, dfr, dillon, grog, jake, jhb, sheldonh
2000-09-07 01:33:02 +00:00
}
Add mtx_lock_giant() and mtx_unlock_giant() wrappers for sysctl management of Giant during the Giant unwinding phase, and start work on instrumenting Giant for the file and proc mutexes. These wrappers allow developers to turn on and off Giant around various subsystems. DEVELOPERS SHOULD NEVER TURN OFF GIANT AROUND A SUBSYSTEM JUST BECAUSE THE SYSCTL EXISTS! General developers should only considering turning on Giant for a subsystem whos default is off (to help track down bugs). Only developers working on particular subsystems who know what they are doing should consider turning off Giant. These wrappers will greatly improve our ability to unwind Giant and test the kernel on a (mostly) subsystem by subsystem basis. They allow Giant unwinding developers (GUDs) to emplace appropriate subsystem and structural mutexes in the main tree and then request that the larger community test the work by turning off Giant around the subsystem(s), without the larger community having to mess around with patches. These wrappers also allow GUDs to boot into a (more likely to be) working system in the midst of their unwinding work and to test that work under more controlled circumstances. There is a master sysctl, kern.giant.all, which defaults to 0 (off). If turned on it overrides *ALL* other kern.giant sysctls and forces Giant to be turned on for all wrapped subsystems. If turned off then Giant around individual subsystems are controlled by various other kern.giant.XXX sysctls. Code which overlaps multiple subsystems must have all related subsystem Giant sysctls turned off in order to run without Giant.
2001-10-26 20:48:04 +00:00
- Move the MI mutexes sched_lock and Giant from being declared in the various machdep.c's to being declared in kern_mutex.c. - Add a new function mutex_init() used to perform early initialization needed for mutexes such as setting up thread0's contested lock list and initializing MI mutexes. Change the various MD startup routines to call this function instead of duplicating all the code themselves. Tested on: alpha, i386
2002-04-02 22:19:16 +00:00
/*
* Intialize the mutex code and system mutexes. This is called from the MD
* startup code prior to mi_startup(). The per-CPU data space needs to be
* setup before this is called.
*/
void
mutex_init(void)
{
Add an implementation of turnstiles and change the sleep mutex code to use turnstiles to implement blocking isntead of implementing a thread queue directly. These turnstiles are somewhat similar to those used in Solaris 7 as described in Solaris Internals but are also different. Turnstiles do not come out of a fixed-sized pool. Rather, each thread is assigned a turnstile when it is created that it frees when it is destroyed. When a thread blocks on a lock, it donates its turnstile to that lock to serve as queue of blocked threads. The queue associated with a given lock is found by a lookup in a simple hash table. The turnstile itself is protected by a lock associated with its entry in the hash table. This means that sched_lock is no longer needed to contest on a mutex. Instead, sched_lock is only used when manipulating run queues or thread priorities. Turnstiles also implement priority propagation inherently. Currently turnstiles only support mutexes. Eventually, however, turnstiles may grow two queue's to support a non-sleepable reader/writer lock implementation. For more details, see the comments in sys/turnstile.h and kern/subr_turnstile.c. The two primary advantages from the turnstile code include: 1) the size of struct mutex shrinks by four pointers as it no longer stores the thread queue linkages directly, and 2) less contention on sched_lock in SMP systems including the ability for multiple CPUs to contend on different locks simultaneously (not that this last detail is necessarily that much of a big win). Note that 1) means that this commit is a kernel ABI breaker, so don't mix old modules with a new kernel and vice versa. Tested on: i386 SMP, sparc64 SMP, alpha SMP
2003-11-11 22:07:29 +00:00
/* Setup turnstiles so that sleep mutexes work. */
init_turnstiles();
- Move the MI mutexes sched_lock and Giant from being declared in the various machdep.c's to being declared in kern_mutex.c. - Add a new function mutex_init() used to perform early initialization needed for mutexes such as setting up thread0's contested lock list and initializing MI mutexes. Change the various MD startup routines to call this function instead of duplicating all the code themselves. Tested on: alpha, i386
2002-04-02 22:19:16 +00:00
/*
* Initialize mutexes.
*/
Change mtx_init() to now take an extra argument. The third argument is the generic lock type for use with witness. If this argument is NULL then the lock name is used as the lock type. Add a macro for a lock type name for network driver locks.
2002-04-04 20:52:27 +00:00
mtx_init(&Giant, "Giant", NULL, MTX_DEF | MTX_RECURSE);
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
mtx_init(&blocked_lock, "blocked lock", NULL, MTX_SPIN);
blocked_lock.mtx_lock = 0xdeadc0de; /* Always blocked. */
Change mtx_init() to now take an extra argument. The third argument is the generic lock type for use with witness. If this argument is NULL then the lock name is used as the lock type. Add a macro for a lock type name for network driver locks.
2002-04-04 20:52:27 +00:00
mtx_init(&proc0.p_mtx, "process lock", NULL, MTX_DEF | MTX_DUPOK);
Commit 3/14 of sched_lock decomposition. - Add a per-turnstile spinlock to solve potential priority propagation deadlocks that are possible with thread_lock(). - The turnstile lock order is defined as the exact opposite of the lock order used with the sleep locks they represent. This allows us to walk in reverse order in priority_propagate and this is the only place we wish to multiply acquire turnstile locks. - Use the turnstile_chain lock to protect assigning mutexes to turnstiles. - Change the turnstile interface to pass back turnstile pointers to the consumers. This allows us to reduce some locking and makes it easier to cancel turnstile assignment while the turnstile chain lock is held. Tested by: kris, current@ Tested on: i386, amd64, ULE, 4BSD, libthr, libkse, PREEMPTION, etc. Discussed with: kris, attilio, kmacy, jhb, julian, bde (small parts each)
2007-06-04 23:51:44 +00:00
mtx_init(&proc0.p_slock, "process slock", NULL, MTX_SPIN | MTX_RECURSE);
Move the initialization of the devmtx into the mutex_init() function called during early init before cninit(). Tested on: i386, alpha, sparc64 Reviewed by: phk, imp Reported by: Divacky Roman xdivac02 at stud dot fit dot vutbr dot cz MFC after: 1 week
2005-10-18 18:27:44 +00:00
mtx_init(&devmtx, "cdev", NULL, MTX_DEF);
- Move the MI mutexes sched_lock and Giant from being declared in the various machdep.c's to being declared in kern_mutex.c. - Add a new function mutex_init() used to perform early initialization needed for mutexes such as setting up thread0's contested lock list and initializing MI mutexes. Change the various MD startup routines to call this function instead of duplicating all the code themselves. Tested on: alpha, i386
2002-04-02 22:19:16 +00:00
mtx_lock(&Giant);
}
Add a new 'show lock' command to ddb. If the argument has a valid lock class, then it displays various information about the lock and calls a new function pointer in lock_class (lc_ddb_show) to dump class-specific information about the lock as well (such as the owner of a mutex or xlock'ed sx lock). This is easier than staring at hex dumps of locks to figure out who owns the lock, etc. Note that extending lock_class doesn't affect the ABI for any kernel modules as the only code that deals with lock_class structures directly is kern_mutex.c, kern_sx.c, and witness. MFC after: 1 week
2005-12-13 23:14:35 +00:00
#ifdef DDB
void
Constify arguments for locking KPIs where possible. This enables locking consumers to pass their own structures around as const and be able to assert locks embedded into those structures. Reviewed by: ed, kib, jhb
2011-11-16 21:51:17 +00:00
db_show_mtx(const struct lock_object *lock)
Add a new 'show lock' command to ddb. If the argument has a valid lock class, then it displays various information about the lock and calls a new function pointer in lock_class (lc_ddb_show) to dump class-specific information about the lock as well (such as the owner of a mutex or xlock'ed sx lock). This is easier than staring at hex dumps of locks to figure out who owns the lock, etc. Note that extending lock_class doesn't affect the ABI for any kernel modules as the only code that deals with lock_class structures directly is kern_mutex.c, kern_sx.c, and witness. MFC after: 1 week
2005-12-13 23:14:35 +00:00
{
struct thread *td;
Constify arguments for locking KPIs where possible. This enables locking consumers to pass their own structures around as const and be able to assert locks embedded into those structures. Reviewed by: ed, kib, jhb
2011-11-16 21:51:17 +00:00
const struct mtx *m;
Add a new 'show lock' command to ddb. If the argument has a valid lock class, then it displays various information about the lock and calls a new function pointer in lock_class (lc_ddb_show) to dump class-specific information about the lock as well (such as the owner of a mutex or xlock'ed sx lock). This is easier than staring at hex dumps of locks to figure out who owns the lock, etc. Note that extending lock_class doesn't affect the ABI for any kernel modules as the only code that deals with lock_class structures directly is kern_mutex.c, kern_sx.c, and witness. MFC after: 1 week
2005-12-13 23:14:35 +00:00
Constify arguments for locking KPIs where possible. This enables locking consumers to pass their own structures around as const and be able to assert locks embedded into those structures. Reviewed by: ed, kib, jhb
2011-11-16 21:51:17 +00:00
m = (const struct mtx *)lock;
Add a new 'show lock' command to ddb. If the argument has a valid lock class, then it displays various information about the lock and calls a new function pointer in lock_class (lc_ddb_show) to dump class-specific information about the lock as well (such as the owner of a mutex or xlock'ed sx lock). This is easier than staring at hex dumps of locks to figure out who owns the lock, etc. Note that extending lock_class doesn't affect the ABI for any kernel modules as the only code that deals with lock_class structures directly is kern_mutex.c, kern_sx.c, and witness. MFC after: 1 week
2005-12-13 23:14:35 +00:00
db_printf(" flags: {");
Add a new file (kern/subr_lock.c) for holding code related to struct lock_obj objects: - Add new lock_init() and lock_destroy() functions to setup and teardown lock_object objects including KTR logging and registering with WITNESS. - Move all the handling of LO_INITIALIZED out of witness and the various lock init functions into lock_init() and lock_destroy(). - Remove the constants for static indices into the lock_classes[] array and change the code outside of subr_lock.c to use LOCK_CLASS to compare against a known lock class. - Move the 'show lock' ddb function and lock_classes[] array out of kern_mutex.c over to subr_lock.c.
2006-01-17 16:55:17 +00:00
if (LOCK_CLASS(lock) == &lock_class_mtx_spin)
Add a new 'show lock' command to ddb. If the argument has a valid lock class, then it displays various information about the lock and calls a new function pointer in lock_class (lc_ddb_show) to dump class-specific information about the lock as well (such as the owner of a mutex or xlock'ed sx lock). This is easier than staring at hex dumps of locks to figure out who owns the lock, etc. Note that extending lock_class doesn't affect the ABI for any kernel modules as the only code that deals with lock_class structures directly is kern_mutex.c, kern_sx.c, and witness. MFC after: 1 week
2005-12-13 23:14:35 +00:00
db_printf("SPIN");
else
db_printf("DEF");
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
if (m->lock_object.lo_flags & LO_RECURSABLE)
Add a new 'show lock' command to ddb. If the argument has a valid lock class, then it displays various information about the lock and calls a new function pointer in lock_class (lc_ddb_show) to dump class-specific information about the lock as well (such as the owner of a mutex or xlock'ed sx lock). This is easier than staring at hex dumps of locks to figure out who owns the lock, etc. Note that extending lock_class doesn't affect the ABI for any kernel modules as the only code that deals with lock_class structures directly is kern_mutex.c, kern_sx.c, and witness. MFC after: 1 week
2005-12-13 23:14:35 +00:00
db_printf(", RECURSE");
Rename the 'mtx_object', 'rw_object', and 'sx_object' members of mutexes, rwlocks, and sx locks to 'lock_object'.
2007-03-21 21:20:51 +00:00
if (m->lock_object.lo_flags & LO_DUPOK)
Add a new 'show lock' command to ddb. If the argument has a valid lock class, then it displays various information about the lock and calls a new function pointer in lock_class (lc_ddb_show) to dump class-specific information about the lock as well (such as the owner of a mutex or xlock'ed sx lock). This is easier than staring at hex dumps of locks to figure out who owns the lock, etc. Note that extending lock_class doesn't affect the ABI for any kernel modules as the only code that deals with lock_class structures directly is kern_mutex.c, kern_sx.c, and witness. MFC after: 1 week
2005-12-13 23:14:35 +00:00
db_printf(", DUPOK");
db_printf("}\n");
db_printf(" state: {");
if (mtx_unowned(m))
db_printf("UNOWNED");
Teach 'show lock' to properly handle a destroyed mutex.
2007-05-08 21:50:46 +00:00
else if (mtx_destroyed(m))
db_printf("DESTROYED");
Add a new 'show lock' command to ddb. If the argument has a valid lock class, then it displays various information about the lock and calls a new function pointer in lock_class (lc_ddb_show) to dump class-specific information about the lock as well (such as the owner of a mutex or xlock'ed sx lock). This is easier than staring at hex dumps of locks to figure out who owns the lock, etc. Note that extending lock_class doesn't affect the ABI for any kernel modules as the only code that deals with lock_class structures directly is kern_mutex.c, kern_sx.c, and witness. MFC after: 1 week
2005-12-13 23:14:35 +00:00
else {
db_printf("OWNED");
if (m->mtx_lock & MTX_CONTESTED)
db_printf(", CONTESTED");
if (m->mtx_lock & MTX_RECURSED)
db_printf(", RECURSED");
}
db_printf("}\n");
Teach 'show lock' to properly handle a destroyed mutex.
2007-05-08 21:50:46 +00:00
if (!mtx_unowned(m) && !mtx_destroyed(m)) {
Add a new 'show lock' command to ddb. If the argument has a valid lock class, then it displays various information about the lock and calls a new function pointer in lock_class (lc_ddb_show) to dump class-specific information about the lock as well (such as the owner of a mutex or xlock'ed sx lock). This is easier than staring at hex dumps of locks to figure out who owns the lock, etc. Note that extending lock_class doesn't affect the ABI for any kernel modules as the only code that deals with lock_class structures directly is kern_mutex.c, kern_sx.c, and witness. MFC after: 1 week
2005-12-13 23:14:35 +00:00
td = mtx_owner(m);
db_printf(" owner: %p (tid %d, pid %d, \"%s\")\n", td,
generally we are interested in what thread did something as opposed to what process. Since threads by default have teh name of the process unless over-written with more useful information, just print the thread name instead.
2007-11-14 06:21:24 +00:00
td->td_tid, td->td_proc->p_pid, td->td_name);
Add a new 'show lock' command to ddb. If the argument has a valid lock class, then it displays various information about the lock and calls a new function pointer in lock_class (lc_ddb_show) to dump class-specific information about the lock as well (such as the owner of a mutex or xlock'ed sx lock). This is easier than staring at hex dumps of locks to figure out who owns the lock, etc. Note that extending lock_class doesn't affect the ABI for any kernel modules as the only code that deals with lock_class structures directly is kern_mutex.c, kern_sx.c, and witness. MFC after: 1 week
2005-12-13 23:14:35 +00:00
if (mtx_recursed(m))
db_printf(" recursed: %d\n", m->mtx_recurse);
}
}
#endif
Reference in New Issue Copy Permalink